技术领域Technical Field
本发明涉及卡片安装装置等。The present invention relates to a card installation device and the like.
背景技术Background Art
以往以来，在医院或配药药房等医疗机构中采用的发药系统，是根据处方数据将药剂等收纳在对每一患者准备的规定的托盘中。在托盘中以能够装卸的方式保持有重写卡，其中，该重写卡显示被收纳于托盘中的药剂名称、或作为该药剂的给药对象的患者姓名等信息。该重写卡的信息，例如在药剂向托盘中的收纳完成之后，由变更被显示在重写卡上的信息的显示变更装置进行重写。具体而言，将从托盘拔取出的重写卡输送至显示变更装置，由显示变更装置将重写卡的信息重写为切合当前托盘的收纳内容的信息。重写后的重写卡被从显示变更装置返回至原来的托盘。Conventionally, the medicine dispensing system used in medical institutions such as hospitals and dispensing pharmacies stores medicines and the like in a specified tray prepared for each patient according to prescription data. A rewrite card is held in the tray in a detachable manner, wherein the rewrite card displays information such as the name of the medicine stored in the tray or the name of the patient to whom the medicine is to be administered. The information on the rewrite card is rewritten by a display change device that changes the information displayed on the rewrite card, for example, after the medicine is stored in the tray. Specifically, the rewrite card extracted from the tray is transported to the display change device, and the display change device rewrites the information on the rewrite card to information that fits the storage content of the current tray. The rewritten rewrite card is returned from the display change device to the original tray.
专利文献1中公开了一种相对于托盘装卸重写卡的装卸装置。具体而言，该装卸装置通过使重写卡在安装重写卡的安装部中进行滑动，从而经由形成于安装部侧面上的插入口，将重写卡相对于该安装部进行插入或拔出。Patent document 1 discloses a loading and unloading device for loading and unloading a rewrite card with respect to a tray. Specifically, the loading and unloading device slides the rewrite card in a mounting portion for mounting the rewrite card, thereby inserting or removing the rewrite card with respect to the mounting portion through an insertion port formed on a side surface of the mounting portion.
【现有技术文献】[Prior art literature]
【专利文献】[Patent Literature]
专利文献1：日本专利、特许第4679168号公报Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 4679168
发明内容Summary of the invention
(发明所要解决的课题)(Problems to be solved by the invention)
然而，虽然专利文献1中公开了相对于安装部使重写卡滑动而进行插入或拔出的内容，但是，并没有具体公开除了滑动之外的其他关于重写卡的装卸方法的内容。However, although Patent Document 1 discloses that the rewrite card is inserted or removed by sliding it relative to the mounting portion, it does not specifically disclose a method for attaching and detaching the rewrite card other than sliding.
另外，专利文献1中并没有具体公开有关具有重写后的重写卡的托盘向托盘保管架的配置方法的内容。Furthermore, Patent Document 1 does not specifically disclose a method for arranging a tray having a rewritten rewrite card in a tray storage rack.
本发明的一方面目的是实现一种卡片安装装置，该卡片安装装置能够相对于保持卡片的卡片保持部高精度地安装卡片。An object of one aspect of the present invention is to realize a card installation device capable of installing a card with high accuracy relative to a card holding portion that holds the card.
另外，本发明的目的在于实现能够高精度地进行卡片的装卸的卡片支架。Another object of the present invention is to realize a card holder capable of loading and unloading a card with high accuracy.
另外，本发明的一方面目的是实现能够提高用户便利性的托盘输送装置。In addition, one object of the present invention is to realize a pallet conveying device capable of improving user convenience.
(用于解决课题的方案)(Solutions to solve problems)
本发明一实施方式涉及的卡片安装装置，其相对于卡片保持部安装卡片，所述卡片保持部具有在保持着具有挠性的卡片的状态下其外缘部的一部分应被插入的间隙，该卡片安装装置包括：卡片吸附部，其从表面侧吸附所述卡片；弯曲机构，其使被所述卡片吸附部吸附的所述卡片弯曲；以及插入动作部，其使通过所述弯曲机构被弯曲的所述卡片，沿着从所述卡片保持部的正面侧朝向所述卡片保持部的第一方向移动，从而将所述外缘部插入所述间隙中。An embodiment of the present invention relates to a card installation device, which installs a card relative to a card holding portion, wherein the card holding portion has a gap into which a portion of an outer edge portion should be inserted while holding a flexible card. The card installation device includes: a card adsorption portion, which adsorbs the card from the surface side; a bending mechanism, which bends the card adsorbed by the card adsorption portion; and an insertion action portion, which moves the card bent by the bending mechanism along a first direction from the front side of the card holding portion toward the card holding portion, thereby inserting the outer edge portion into the gap.
另外，本发明一实施方式涉及的卡片支架，设置在收纳药剂的托盘的侧面且将具有挠性的卡片进行保持，其中，在所述卡片支架的外缘部的相对置的部分上设置有一对爪部，所述一对爪部沿着所述卡片的变形方向突出，该变形方向是指所述卡片边弯曲边被从所述卡片支架的正面拔除时、或者所述卡片边弯曲边被从所述卡片支架的正面安装时的所述卡片的变形方向。In addition, a card holder involved in one embodiment of the present invention is arranged on the side of a tray for storing medicines and holds a flexible card, wherein a pair of claws are provided on opposite portions of the outer edge of the card holder, and the pair of claws protrude along the deformation direction of the card, and the deformation direction refers to the deformation direction of the card when the card is pulled out from the front side of the card holder while being bent, or when the card is installed from the front side of the card holder while being bent.
另外，本发明一实施方式涉及的托盘输送装置，其将托盘输送到用于保管收纳有药剂的多个托盘的托盘保管架中，该托盘输送装置具有托盘输送部，其中，所述托盘输送部在将所述多个托盘划分为搬运目的地互不相同的第一托盘组和第二托盘组并向所述托盘保管架发出的情况下，当在正向所述托盘保管架发出所述第一托盘组时，受理了表示允许向所述托盘保管架发出所述第二托盘组的用户输入的情况下，在向所述托盘保管架的所述第一托盘组的发出完成之后，接着开始所述第二托盘组的发出。In addition, a pallet conveying device according to an embodiment of the present invention conveys a pallet to a tray storage rack for storing a plurality of pallets containing medicines, the pallet conveying device comprising a pallet conveying unit, wherein, when the pallet conveying unit divides the plurality of pallets into a first pallet group and a second pallet group having different conveying destinations and sends the pallets to the tray storage rack, when the first pallet group is being sent to the tray storage rack, if a user input indicating permission to send the second pallet group to the tray storage rack is accepted, the sending of the second pallet group is started after the sending of the first pallet group to the tray storage rack is completed.
(发明效果)(Effects of the Invention)
根据本发明一实施方式涉及的卡片安装装置，能够相对于卡片保持部高精度地安装卡片。According to the card mounting device according to one embodiment of the present invention, a card can be mounted with high accuracy on a card holding portion.
另外，根据本发明一实施方式涉及的卡片支架，能够高精度地进行卡片的装卸。Furthermore, according to the card holder according to one embodiment of the present invention, the card can be loaded and unloaded with high accuracy.
另外，根据本发明一实施方式涉及的托盘输送装置，能够提高用户的便利性。Furthermore, according to the pallet conveying device according to an embodiment of the present invention, user convenience can be improved.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1是表示发药系统的构成例的图。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a medicine dispensing system.
图2是表示托盘的构成例的图。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a tray.
图3是表示重写卡的一例的图。FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a rewrite card.
图4是表示托盘发出装置的构成例的框图。FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a tray sending-out device.
图5是表示卡片信息变更单元的构成的立体图。FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the structure of a card information changing unit.
图6是表示卡片装卸装置所具备的位置传感器的图。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a position sensor included in the card loading and unloading device.
图7是表示卡片输送装置的构成的图。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the structure of the card transport device.
图8是将重写卡收纳于卡片支架时的卡片吸附部的侧视图。FIG. 8 is a side view of the card adsorption portion when the rewrite card is accommodated in the card holder.
图9是表示从卡片支架拔出重写卡时的卡片装卸装置的动作例的图。FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the card loading and unloading device when the rewrite card is pulled out from the card holder.
图10是表示卡片装卸装置将重写卡载置于卡片载置部上的动作的图。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation of the card loading and unloading device to load the rewrite card on the card loading section.
图11是表示升降装置的构成例的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a lifting device.
图12是表示第二支撑部的动作例的图。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the second supporting portion.
图13是表示将托盘输送至托盘保管架时的第一支撑部和第二支撑部的动作例的图。FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the first supporting portion and the second supporting portion when the pallet is conveyed to the pallet storage rack.
图14是表示托盘保管架中的托盘的保管例的图。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of storage of pallets in a pallet storage rack.
图15是表示由升降控制部执行的控制例的流程图。FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control example executed by the lifting control unit.
图16是表示卡片支架的构成例的图。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a card holder.
图17是表示卡片支架的变形例的图。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a modified example of the card holder.
图18是表示卡片支架的变形例的图。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a modified example of the card holder.
图19是表示卡片支架的变形例的图。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a modified example of the card holder.
图20是表示卡片信息变更单元的另一构成的概略图。FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing another structure of the card information changing unit.
图21是表示托盘的构成例的图。FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a tray.
图22是表示卡片支架的构成例的图。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a card holder.
图23是表示将重写卡安装至卡片支架上时的动作例的图。FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of operation when the rewrite card is mounted on the card holder.
图24是表示托盘的构成例的立体图。FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a structural example of a tray.
图25是表示将支架保持部件安装于托盘的状态的图。FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a state where the stand holding member is mounted on the tray.
图26是表示将支架保持部件安装于托盘的状态的图。FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a state where the stand holding member is mounted on the tray.
图27是表示托盘发出装置的概略构成的一例的图。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a tray sending-out device.
图28是表示托盘保管架的一例的图。FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a tray storage rack.
图29是表示将托盘输送至托盘保管架的最下段以外的保管位置时的、托盘的输送例的图。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of conveyance of a pallet when the pallet is conveyed to a storage position other than the lowermost stage of the pallet storage rack.
图30是表示将托盘输送至托盘保管架的最下段第三位置时的、托盘的输送例的图。FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of conveyance of a pallet when the pallet is conveyed to the third position at the bottom of the pallet storage rack.
图31是表示将托盘输送至托盘保管架的最下段第二位置及最下段第一位置时的、托盘的输送例的图。31 is a diagram showing an example of conveyance of a pallet when the pallet is conveyed to the lowermost second position and the lowermost first position of the pallet storage rack.
图32是表示锁定机构的一例的立体图。FIG. 32 is a perspective view showing an example of a locking mechanism.
图33是表示锁定机构的动作例的图。FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an operation example of the locking mechanism.
图34是表示变形例的锁定机构的一例的图。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a locking mechanism according to a modified example.
图35是表示变形例的锁定机构的内部结构的俯视图。FIG. 35 is a plan view showing the internal structure of a locking mechanism according to a modified example.
具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[实施方式一][Implementation Method 1]
[发药系统][Medicine dispensing system]
图1是表示发药系统1的构成例的图。发药系统1是根据处方数据发出药剂(例如：注射剂)的系统。如图1中所示，例如，发药系统1具备：托盘供给装置10、标签打印装置20、各种发药装置31～34、注射单打印装置40、托盘发出装置50以及托盘保管架60(手推架)。另外，在各装置的底部上，设置有用于输送托盘600的托盘输送机构80(参照图11)。FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a medicine dispensing system 1. The medicine dispensing system 1 is a system for dispensing medicines (e.g., injections) according to prescription data. As shown in FIG. 1 , for example, the medicine dispensing system 1 includes a tray supply device 10, a label printing device 20, various medicine dispensing devices 31 to 34, an injection order printing device 40, a tray dispensing device 50, and a tray storage rack 60 (hand push rack). In addition, a tray conveying mechanism 80 for conveying a tray 600 is provided at the bottom of each device (see FIG. 11 ).
另外，上述处方数据被输入能够与发药系统1进行通信的处方输入终端装置(未图示)，发药系统1从处方输入终端装置获取处方数据。处方输入终端装置是发药系统1的上一级系统的一例，其例如是配置在医院或养老保健设施等中的电子病历系统、配置在医院内部或外部的药房中的配药管理系统。处方数据也可以经由发药系统1所具备的触摸面板70而被输入。In addition, the prescription data is input into a prescription input terminal device (not shown) that can communicate with the medicine dispensing system 1, and the medicine dispensing system 1 obtains the prescription data from the prescription input terminal device. The prescription input terminal device is an example of a higher-level system of the medicine dispensing system 1, and is, for example, an electronic medical record system configured in a hospital or a nursing care facility, or a medicine dispensing management system configured in a pharmacy inside or outside the hospital. The prescription data can also be input via the touch panel 70 provided in the medicine dispensing system 1.
另外，处方数据也被称为“对一患者给药所涉及的处方数据”。作为对一患者给药所涉及的处方数据，例如，可以举出以下的(1)～(3)。In addition, prescription data is also referred to as “prescription data related to drug administration to a patient.” Examples of prescription data related to drug administration to a patient include the following (1) to (3).
(1)给药至一患者的药剂相关的数据(一患者单位的处方数据)。(1) Data related to drugs administered to a patient (prescription data per patient unit).
(2)给药至一患者的一次量药剂相关的数据(一处方单位的处方数据)。(2) Data related to a dose of a drug administered to a patient (prescription data for one prescription unit).
(3)针对给药至一患者的一次量药剂开出处方时被赋予分类的情况下的、该分类相关的数据(1RP(味(recipe))单位的处方数据)。(3) When a classification is assigned to a single dose of a drug to be administered to a patient, data related to the classification (prescription data in 1RP (recipe) units).
托盘供给装置10保管用于收纳被从发药装置31～34发出的药剂的托盘600(空的托盘600)，并根据处方数据向发药装置31～34供给托盘。The tray supply device 10 stores trays 600 (empty trays 600 ) for storing medicines dispensed from the medicine dispensing devices 31 to 34 , and supplies trays to the medicine dispensing devices 31 to 34 based on prescription data.
图2是表示托盘600的结构例的图。如图2中所示，在托盘600的侧面上设置有用于保持具有挠性的重写卡RC(卡片)的卡片支架500(卡片保持部、第一卡片保持部)。卡片支架500设置在托盘600的、与后述卡片信息变更单元100的卡片装卸装置150(吸附装置)对置的位置处。卡片支架500通过具有后述的一对爪部514a～514d(参照图16的16001)，而具有在保持着重写卡RC的状态下其外缘部的一部分应被插入的间隙。关于卡片支架500的详细情况，之后进行说明。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a structural example of a tray 600. As shown in FIG. 2, a card holder 500 (card holding portion, first card holding portion) for holding a flexible rewrite card RC (card) is provided on the side surface of the tray 600. The card holder 500 is provided at a position of the tray 600 that is opposite to a card loading and unloading device 150 (adsorption device) of a card information changing unit 100 described later. The card holder 500 has a gap into which a part of the outer edge portion should be inserted when holding the rewrite card RC by having a pair of claws 514a to 514d described later (refer to 16001 in FIG. 16). The details of the card holder 500 will be described later.
如图1中所示，发药装置31～34分别根据处方数据，针对每一患者将药剂发出至托盘600。作为发药装置31～34，例如，可以举出退还药发出装置、固定药发出装置、特殊药发出装置以及瓶发出装置。退还药发出装置是发出被病房等退回的药剂(退还药)的装置。固定药发出装置是发出由使用者(例如：医生或护士等的医护人员)预先收纳的药剂(固定药)的装置。特殊药发出装置是发出特殊药剂的装置。瓶发出装置是发出收纳药液的瓶的装置。作为特殊药剂，例如，可以举出被要求特殊管理的药剂、针对复杂疾病使用的药剂、或者较昂贵的药剂。以下，将发药装置31～34统称为“发药装置30”。发药系统1只要具备至少一种发药装置30即可。另外，注射单打印装置40根据处方数据打印注射单。As shown in FIG. 1 , the medicine dispensing devices 31 to 34 dispense medicines to the tray 600 for each patient according to the prescription data. Examples of the medicine dispensing devices 31 to 34 include a returned medicine dispensing device, a fixed medicine dispensing device, a special medicine dispensing device, and a bottle dispensing device. The returned medicine dispensing device is a device that dispenses medicines (returned medicines) returned by a ward, etc. The fixed medicine dispensing device is a device that dispenses medicines (fixed medicines) pre-stored by a user (e.g., a medical staff such as a doctor or a nurse). The special medicine dispensing device is a device that dispenses special medicines. The bottle dispensing device is a device that dispenses bottles containing liquid medicines. Examples of special medicines include medicines that require special management, medicines used for complex diseases, or more expensive medicines. Hereinafter, the medicine dispensing devices 31 to 34 are collectively referred to as "medicine dispensing devices 30". The medicine dispensing system 1 only needs to have at least one medicine dispensing device 30. In addition, the injection order printing device 40 prints an injection order according to the prescription data.
托盘发出装置50向托盘保管架60发出收纳有由发药装置30发出来的药剂的托盘600。另外，在托盘发出装置50向托盘保管架60发出托盘600之前，将重写卡RC从卡片支架500拔出之后，根据处方数据对重写卡RC的显示信息进行重写。在使重写了显示信息的重写卡RC返回到托盘600之后，托盘发出装置50向托盘保管架60发出托盘600。由此，能够使重写卡RC的显示内容与托盘600的收纳内容一致。The tray issuing device 50 issues a tray 600 containing medicines issued by the medicine issuing device 30 to the tray storage rack 60. Before the tray issuing device 50 issues the tray 600 to the tray storage rack 60, the display information of the rewrite card RC is rewritten according to the prescription data after the rewrite card RC is pulled out from the card holder 500. After the rewrite card RC with the rewritten display information is returned to the tray 600, the tray issuing device 50 issues the tray 600 to the tray storage rack 60. In this way, the display content of the rewrite card RC can be made consistent with the storage content of the tray 600.
重写卡RC显示被收纳于托盘600中的药剂相关的各种信息。通过后述的卡片信息变更单元100的显示变更装置250，重写卡RC的显示信息被重写。由此，重写卡RC能够与托盘600的收纳物的变更相对应而进行显示。作为重写卡RC，只要是能够变更显示信息的构件即可，例如，可以举出无色式或白浊式卡片。The rewrite card RC displays various information related to the medicines stored in the tray 600. The display information of the rewrite card RC is rewritten by the display change device 250 of the card information change unit 100 described later. Thus, the rewrite card RC can be displayed in accordance with the change of the storage content of the tray 600. The rewrite card RC can be any member as long as it can change the display information, for example, a colorless or turbid card.
图3是表示重写卡RC的一例的图。如图3中所示，在重写卡RC中，例如显示作为被收纳于托盘600中的药剂的给药对象的患者姓名、该患者住院的病房名称及房间号、以及向托盘600发出药剂的实施日等的信息。另外，在图3的示例中，在重写卡RC上，以条形码形式显示有表示被收纳于托盘600中的药剂的信息。Fig. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a rewrite card RC. As shown in Fig. 3, the rewrite card RC displays information such as the name of the patient to whom the medicine stored in the tray 600 is to be administered, the name and room number of the ward where the patient is hospitalized, and the date on which the medicine is to be delivered to the tray 600. In the example of Fig. 3, information indicating the medicine stored in the tray 600 is displayed in the form of a barcode on the rewrite card RC.
另外，本实施方式的重写卡RC，其角部RCc的形状形成为曲线形状(大致C形)。由此，能够提高向卡片支架500或卡片载置部210(卡片保持部、第二卡片保持部)(参照图5、图7)安装(插入、交接)时的精度。In addition, the rewrite card RC of this embodiment has a corner RCc formed into a curved shape (roughly C-shaped), thereby improving the accuracy of installation (insertion, transfer) to the card holder 500 or the card loading portion 210 (card holding portion, second card holding portion) (see Figures 5 and 7).
托盘保管架60保管由托盘发出装置50发出的托盘600。托盘保管架60设置有能够保管多个托盘600的、m×n个(m、n均为1以上的整数)的托盘保管部(保管位置)(参照图14)。托盘发出装置50是在托盘保管架60以与托盘发出装置50对置的方式配置于插入口53(参照图11)的状态下，保管托盘600。The pallet storage rack 60 stores the pallet 600 sent out by the pallet sending device 50. The pallet storage rack 60 is provided with m×n (m, n are both integers greater than or equal to 1) pallet storage sections (storage positions) (see FIG. 14 ) capable of storing a plurality of pallets 600. The pallet sending device 50 stores the pallet 600 in a state where the pallet storage rack 60 is arranged at the insertion port 53 (see FIG. 11 ) so as to face the pallet sending device 50.
另外，发药系统1具备触摸面板70。触摸面板70显示例如处方数据以及发药系统1的工作状况。另外，触摸面板70受理发药系统1的工作开始或停止等的各种用户输入。In addition, the medicine dispensing system 1 includes a touch panel 70. The touch panel 70 displays, for example, prescription data and the operating status of the medicine dispensing system 1. In addition, the touch panel 70 receives various user inputs such as starting or stopping the operation of the medicine dispensing system 1.
[托盘发出装置][Tray dispensing device]
图4是表示托盘发出装置50的构成例的框图。如图4中所示，托盘发出装置50具备卡片信息变更单元100、升降装置300、以及控制装置400。另外，关于控制装置400，不一定必须设置在托盘发出装置50中，其也可以以能够通信的方式与托盘发出装置50及触摸面板70连接。Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the tray issuing device 50. As shown in Fig. 4, the tray issuing device 50 includes a card information changing unit 100, a lifting device 300, and a control device 400. In addition, the control device 400 is not necessarily provided in the tray issuing device 50, and may be connected to the tray issuing device 50 and the touch panel 70 in a communicable manner.
升降装置300将被从发药装置30输送来的托盘600，从卡片信息变更单元100向托盘保管架60输送。即，升降装置300作为向托盘保管架60输送托盘600的托盘输送装置(排出升降器)发挥作用。关于升降装置300的详细情况，之后进行说明。The lifting device 300 conveys the tray 600 conveyed from the medicine dispensing device 30 from the card information changing unit 100 to the tray storage rack 60. That is, the lifting device 300 functions as a tray conveying device (discharge lifter) that conveys the tray 600 to the tray storage rack 60. The details of the lifting device 300 will be described later.
卡片信息变更单元100包括卡片装卸装置150、卡片输送装置200以及显示变更装置250。The card information changing unit 100 includes a card loading and unloading device 150 , a card transporting device 200 , and a display changing device 250 .
卡片装卸装置150将重写卡RC安装于卡片支架500或卡片载置部210(后述)，或者从卡片支架500或卡片载置部210拆卸重写卡RC。如后所述，卡片载置部210设置在卡片输送装置200的与卡片装卸装置150对置的位置上(参照图5)。卡片载置部210作为如下的载置台发挥作用，该载置台用于实现被卡片装卸装置150拔除的重写卡RC在卡片装卸装置150与显示变更装置250之间的输送。The card loading and unloading device 150 mounts the rewrite card RC on the card holder 500 or the card loading section 210 (described later), or removes the rewrite card RC from the card holder 500 or the card loading section 210. As described later, the card loading section 210 is provided at a position of the card transport device 200 that is opposite to the card loading and unloading device 150 (see FIG. 5 ). The card loading section 210 functions as a loading platform for transporting the rewrite card RC removed by the card loading and unloading device 150 between the card loading and unloading device 150 and the display changing device 250.
另外，在本实施方式中，关于卡片装卸装置150，以实现下述两功能的情况为例进行说明，即：(1)向卡片支架500或卡片载置部210安装重写卡RC的功能，以及(2)从卡片支架500或卡片载置部210拔除重写卡RC的功能。换言之，卡片装卸装置150是下述装置，即：具有由后述的卡片安装装置(参照变形例五)实现的功能，并且，能够将被保持于卡片支架500或卡片载置部210的重写卡RC拔除。In addition, in this embodiment, the card loading and unloading device 150 is described by taking the case where the following two functions are realized as an example, namely: (1) a function of installing a rewrite card RC into the card holder 500 or the card loading section 210, and (2) a function of removing the rewrite card RC from the card holder 500 or the card loading section 210. In other words, the card loading and unloading device 150 is a device that has the functions realized by the card installation device (see Modification Example 5) described later, and can remove the rewrite card RC held in the card holder 500 or the card loading section 210.
卡片输送装置200将被载置于卡片载置部210的重写卡RC输送至显示变更装置250，或者将由显示变更装置250重写了显示信息的重写卡RC输送至卡片载置部210。另外，关于卡片装卸装置150和卡片输送装置200的详细情况，之后进行说明。The card transport device 200 transports the rewrite card RC placed on the card loading unit 210 to the display changing device 250, or transports the rewrite card RC on which the display information is rewritten by the display changing device 250 to the card loading unit 210. The card loading and unloading device 150 and the card transport device 200 will be described in detail later.
显示变更装置250将由卡片输送装置200输送的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更。显示变更装置250设置在卡片输送装置200中的、卡片载置部210的附近位置处。The display changing device 250 changes the display information of the rewrite card RC transported by the card transport device 200 . The display changing device 250 is provided in the vicinity of the card loading unit 210 in the card transport device 200 .
控制装置400集中控制托盘发出装置50。控制装置400包括升降控制部410、移动控制部420、电磁阀控制部430、卡片有无判断部440、卡片输送控制部450、显示变更控制部460、以及触摸面板控制部470。The control device 400 centrally controls the tray dispensing device 50 . The control device 400 includes a lifting control unit 410 , a movement control unit 420 , a solenoid valve control unit 430 , a card presence determination unit 440 , a card transport control unit 450 , a display change control unit 460 , and a touch panel control unit 470 .
升降控制部410控制升降装置300。卡片输送控制部450控制卡片输送装置200。显示变更控制部460控制显示变更装置250。触摸面板控制部470控制向触摸面板70的显示或输入。The lifting control unit 410 controls the lifting device 300 . The card transport control unit 450 controls the card transport device 200 . The display change control unit 460 controls the display change device 250 . The touch panel control unit 470 controls display or input to the touch panel 70 .
另外，移动控制部420控制卡片装卸装置150所具备的卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153(两者均之后进行说明)的移动。电磁阀控制部430通过控制电磁阀172的接通/断开(ON/OFF)，从而对经由卡片吸附部151的外部空气的吸引进行控制。卡片有无判断部440判断卡片是否被安装于卡片支架500上。In addition, the movement control unit 420 controls the movement of the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 (both of which will be described later) provided in the card loading and unloading device 150. The solenoid valve control unit 430 controls the suction of external air through the card adsorption unit 151 by controlling the ON/OFF of the solenoid valve 172. The card presence determination unit 440 determines whether a card is mounted on the card holder 500.
另外，对于控制装置400的各部的详细情况，与之后叙述的各装置的说明一同进行说明。In addition, the details of each part of the control device 400 will be described together with the description of each device described later.
<卡片信息变更单元><Card Information Change Unit>
图5是表示卡片信息变更单元100的构成的立体图。在图5中，以符号5001和5002示出从两个不同方向观察卡片信息变更单元100时的立体图。如图5中所示，卡片信息变更单元100包括卡片装卸装置150、卡片输送装置200以及显示变更装置250。FIG5 is a perspective view showing the structure of the card information changing unit 100. In FIG5, the perspective views of the card information changing unit 100 when viewed from two different directions are shown by reference numerals 5001 and 5002. As shown in FIG5, the card information changing unit 100 includes a card loading and unloading device 150, a card transport device 200, and a display changing device 250.
卡片装卸装置150包括卡片吸附部151、引导部152和153(一对引导部)、以及支撑部161。另外，卡片装卸装置150包括过滤器171、电磁阀172、Z轴电动机173(插入动作部)、θ轴电动机174(旋转部)、吸附确认传感器175、卡片检测部176、真空泵(未图示)、以及多个位置传感器。Z轴是指表示卡片吸附部151朝向卡片支架500的方向或远离卡片支架500的方向的轴(图5中以实线表示的Z轴)，或者，表示朝向卡片载置部210的方向或远离卡片载置部210的方向的轴(图5中以虚线表示的Z轴)。θ轴是指与Z轴垂直的水平面内的轴。关于多个位置传感器，之后参照图6进行说明。The card loading and unloading device 150 includes a card adsorption portion 151, guide portions 152 and 153 (a pair of guide portions), and a support portion 161. In addition, the card loading and unloading device 150 includes a filter 171, an electromagnetic valve 172, a Z-axis motor 173 (insertion action portion), a θ-axis motor 174 (rotation portion), an adsorption confirmation sensor 175, a card detection portion 176, a vacuum pump (not shown), and a plurality of position sensors. The Z-axis refers to an axis indicating a direction of the card adsorption portion 151 toward the card holder 500 or a direction away from the card holder 500 (the Z-axis indicated by a solid line in FIG. 5 ), or an axis indicating a direction toward the card loading portion 210 or a direction away from the card loading portion 210 (the Z-axis indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 5 ). The θ-axis refers to an axis in a horizontal plane perpendicular to the Z-axis. The plurality of position sensors will be described later with reference to FIG. 6 .
在上述控制装置400中，移动控制部420控制Z轴电动机173和θ轴电动机174。电磁阀控制部430控制电磁阀172。另外，卡片有无判断部440根据卡片检测部176的信号，判断卡片支架500中有无重写卡RC。In the control device 400, the movement control unit 420 controls the Z-axis motor 173 and the θ-axis motor 174. The solenoid valve control unit 430 controls the solenoid valve 172. In addition, the card presence determination unit 440 determines whether the rewrite card RC is present in the card holder 500 based on the signal of the card detection unit 176.
卡片吸附部151是将重写卡RC从其表面侧吸附的吸附垫。卡片吸附部151是由具有挠性的材料形成的、且具有与重写卡RC抵接的缘部的杯状部件。在本实施方式中，卡片吸附部151安装于支撑部161上。The card adsorption part 151 is a pad that adsorbs the rewrite card RC from its surface side. The card adsorption part 151 is a cup-shaped member formed of a flexible material and having an edge that abuts against the rewrite card RC. In this embodiment, the card adsorption part 151 is mounted on the support part 161.
过滤器171是用于将灰尘等从被真空泵吸引的空气中除去的过滤器。电磁阀172是对真空泵针对由卡片吸附部151和重写卡RC限定的空间进行的吸引进行控制的阀。卡片吸附部151经由过滤器171和电磁阀172与真空泵连接。The filter 171 is a filter for removing dust and the like from the air sucked by the vacuum pump. The electromagnetic valve 172 is a valve for controlling the vacuum pump to suck the space defined by the card suction unit 151 and the rewrite card RC. The card suction unit 151 is connected to the vacuum pump via the filter 171 and the electromagnetic valve 172.
在电磁阀172呈接通(ON)状态下，上述空间的空气被真空泵吸引，由此，重写卡RC被卡片吸附部151吸附。另一方面，在电磁阀172呈断开(OFF)状态下，由于上述空间的空气不再被真空泵吸引，因此，重写卡RC被从卡片吸附部151释放。When the electromagnetic valve 172 is in the ON state, the air in the space is sucked by the vacuum pump, and thus the rewrite card RC is sucked by the card suction unit 151. On the other hand, when the electromagnetic valve 172 is in the OFF state, the air in the space is no longer sucked by the vacuum pump, and therefore the rewrite card RC is released from the card suction unit 151.
Z轴电动机173使通过包含引导部152和153的弯曲机构(后述)而被弯曲的重写卡RC沿其表背方向移动，由此相对于卡片支架500或卡片输送装置200的卡片载置部210安装或拆卸重写卡RC。表背方向可以包括：(1)从卡片支架500(或卡片载置部210)的正面侧朝向卡片支架500(或卡片载置部210)的第一方向，以及(2)与第一方向相反的第二方向。表背方向(第一方向或第二方向)包括相对于被保持于卡片支架500或卡片载置部210时的重写卡RC表面的垂直方向，但不限于该方向，也可以为相对于该垂直方向倾斜的方向。以下，作为上述表背方向的一例，使用上述垂直方向进行说明。The Z-axis motor 173 moves the rewrite card RC bent by the bending mechanism (described later) including the guides 152 and 153 in the front-back direction thereof, thereby installing or removing the rewrite card RC relative to the card holder 500 or the card loading section 210 of the card conveying device 200. The front-back direction may include: (1) a first direction from the front side of the card holder 500 (or the card loading section 210) toward the card holder 500 (or the card loading section 210), and (2) a second direction opposite to the first direction. The front-back direction (the first direction or the second direction) includes a vertical direction relative to the surface of the rewrite card RC when it is held in the card holder 500 or the card loading section 210, but is not limited to this direction and may also be a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction. In the following, the vertical direction is used as an example of the above-mentioned front-back direction for description.
具体而言，Z轴电动机173使卡片吸附部151沿上述垂直方向移动。上述垂直方向是图5中所示并且如上所述的Z轴方向。即，Z轴电动机173使卡片吸附部151沿着Z轴方向移动。在本实施方式中，Z轴电动机173使支撑部161沿该方向移动，由此使安装于支撑部161上的卡片吸附部151移动。但是，Z轴电动机173也可以仅使卡片吸附部151移动。Z轴电动机173例如是步进电动机。Specifically, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the card adsorption portion 151 along the vertical direction. The vertical direction is the Z-axis direction shown in FIG. 5 and described above. That is, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the card adsorption portion 151 along the Z-axis direction. In the present embodiment, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the support portion 161 along the direction, thereby moving the card adsorption portion 151 mounted on the support portion 161. However, the Z-axis motor 173 may also move only the card adsorption portion 151. The Z-axis motor 173 is, for example, a stepping motor.
Z轴电动机173一边使重写卡RC弯曲一边相对于卡片支架500安装或拆卸重写卡RC。具体而言，Z轴电动机173利用引导部152和153引导重写卡RC并使其弯曲。通过如此地使重写卡RC弯曲并相对于卡片支架500安装或拆卸重写卡RC，能够顺利地进行装卸。另外，与使用例如辊等，使重写卡RC沿平行于该重写卡RC表面的方向滑动而装卸重写卡RC的构成相比，能够避免在装卸重写卡RC的过程中该重写卡RC被堵住等的不良情况。The Z-axis motor 173 bends the rewrite card RC while installing or removing the rewrite card RC relative to the card holder 500. Specifically, the Z-axis motor 173 guides and bends the rewrite card RC using the guides 152 and 153. By bending the rewrite card RC in this way and installing or removing the rewrite card RC relative to the card holder 500, the rewrite card RC can be smoothly loaded and unloaded. In addition, compared with a configuration in which the rewrite card RC is loaded and unloaded by sliding the rewrite card RC in a direction parallel to the surface of the rewrite card RC using a roller or the like, it is possible to avoid a problem such as the rewrite card RC being blocked during the loading and unloading process.
在吸附重写卡RC时，移动控制部420利用Z轴电动机173使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153沿上述第一方向接近卡片支架500。由此，使被卡片支架500保持的重写卡RC被卡片吸附部151吸附。进一步地，在卡片吸附部151吸附了重写卡RC的状态下，Z轴电动机173使卡片吸附部151相对于引导部152和153相对地沿上述第二方向移动。例如，Z轴电动机173将卡片吸附部151拉入较之与重写卡RC接触的引导部152和153更加卡片装卸装置150的内部侧。由此，当从卡片支架500中拔除重写卡RC时，能够使被吸附的重写卡RC弯曲。When adsorbing the rewrite card RC, the movement control unit 420 uses the Z-axis motor 173 to make the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 approach the card holder 500 along the first direction. As a result, the rewrite card RC held by the card holder 500 is adsorbed by the card adsorption unit 151. Furthermore, in a state where the card adsorption unit 151 adsorbs the rewrite card RC, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the card adsorption unit 151 relative to the guide units 152 and 153 along the second direction. For example, the Z-axis motor 173 pulls the card adsorption unit 151 into the inner side of the card loading and unloading device 150 more than the guide units 152 and 153 in contact with the rewrite card RC. As a result, when the rewrite card RC is removed from the card holder 500, the adsorbed rewrite card RC can be bent.
在将重写卡RC压入(安装)到卡片支架500中时，移动控制部420使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153在Z轴电动机173的驱动下沿上述第一方向靠近卡片支架500。由此，将被卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153以弯曲状态保持的重写卡RC压入卡片支架500中。因此，卡片装卸装置150能够将以弯曲状态保持的重写卡RC，在保持该弯曲状态不变的情况下安装在卡片支架500上。When the rewrite card RC is pressed into (installed in) the card holder 500, the movement control unit 420 causes the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 to approach the card holder 500 along the first direction under the drive of the Z-axis motor 173. Thus, the rewrite card RC held in a bent state by the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 is pressed into the card holder 500. Therefore, the card loading and unloading device 150 can install the rewrite card RC held in a bent state on the card holder 500 while maintaining the bent state.
θ轴电动机174使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153旋转，以使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153分别与卡片支架500和设置在卡片输送装置200中的卡片载置部210相对。在本实施方式中，θ轴电动机174使支撑部161围绕与图5所示的且平行于上述θ轴的轴旋转，由此使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153旋转。如此，通过使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153旋转，从而将重写卡RC面对着卡片支架500的状态和重写卡RC面对着卡片载置部210的状态进行切换。由此，与例如使重写卡RC平行移动的构成相比，能够减少卡片装卸装置150的空间。θ轴电动机174例如是步进电动机。The θ-axis motor 174 rotates the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 so that the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 are opposed to the card holder 500 and the card loading portion 210 provided in the card transport device 200, respectively. In the present embodiment, the θ-axis motor 174 rotates the support portion 161 about an axis parallel to the θ-axis shown in FIG. 5 , thereby rotating the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153. In this way, by rotating the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153, a state in which the rewrite card RC faces the card holder 500 and a state in which the rewrite card RC faces the card loading portion 210 are switched. Thus, compared with a configuration in which the rewrite card RC is moved in parallel, for example, the space of the card loading and unloading device 150 can be reduced. The θ-axis motor 174 is, for example, a stepping motor.
在本实施方式中，在利用卡片装卸装置150进行重写卡RC的装卸时，卡片支架500位于卡片装卸装置150的水平方向上。即，卡片装卸装置150设置在下述位置：即，在通过托盘输送机构80而被从发药装置30输送来的托盘600所停止的位置上与卡片支架500相对的位置(参照图11的11001)。另外，卡片载置部210位于卡片装卸装置150的垂直方向上。因此，能够在不改变托盘600的姿势的情况下，将被配置于托盘600侧面的卡片支架500所保持的重写卡RC安装或拆卸。另外，仅通过使卡片装卸装置150旋转90°，便能够使被从托盘600中拔除的重写卡RC移动至用于载置到卡片载置部210上的位置(反之亦然)。因此，能够减小卡片装卸装置150所需的空间，并且能够提高卡片信息变更单元100的安装自由度。In this embodiment, when the rewrite card RC is loaded and unloaded by the card loading and unloading device 150, the card holder 500 is located in the horizontal direction of the card loading and unloading device 150. That is, the card loading and unloading device 150 is set at the following position: that is, the position opposite to the card holder 500 at the position where the tray 600 conveyed from the medicine dispensing device 30 by the tray conveying mechanism 80 stops (refer to 11001 of Figure 11). In addition, the card loading section 210 is located in the vertical direction of the card loading and unloading device 150. Therefore, the rewrite card RC held by the card holder 500 arranged on the side of the tray 600 can be installed or removed without changing the posture of the tray 600. In addition, the rewrite card RC removed from the tray 600 can be moved to a position for loading on the card loading section 210 (and vice versa) by simply rotating the card loading and unloading device 150 by 90 degrees. Therefore, the space required for the card loading and unloading device 150 can be reduced, and the installation freedom of the card information changing unit 100 can be improved.
吸附确认传感器175是气压传感器，其输出：在卡片吸附部151与重写卡RC抵接的状态下，被卡片吸附部151和重写卡RC限定的空间的气压信号。在图5所示的例子中，吸附确认传感器175设置在过滤器171与电磁阀172之间。The suction confirmation sensor 175 is an air pressure sensor that outputs an air pressure signal of a space defined by the card suction unit 151 and the rewrite card RC when the card suction unit 151 and the rewrite card RC are in contact. In the example shown in FIG. 5 , the suction confirmation sensor 175 is disposed between the filter 171 and the electromagnetic valve 172 .
若吸附确认传感器175的输出信号所示的气压小于规定阈值，则移动控制部420判断为重写卡RC被卡片吸附部151吸附。另一方面，若上述输出信号所示的气压为规定阈值以上，则移动控制部420判断为重写卡RC未被卡片吸附部151吸附。If the air pressure indicated by the output signal of the suction confirmation sensor 175 is less than a predetermined threshold, the movement control unit 420 determines that the rewrite card RC is sucked by the card suction unit 151. On the other hand, if the air pressure indicated by the output signal is greater than a predetermined threshold, the movement control unit 420 determines that the rewrite card RC is not sucked by the card suction unit 151.
卡片检测部176是检测重写卡RC是否被保持在卡片支架500上的传感器。卡片检测部176例如具有对重写卡RC或卡片支架500发光的发光部、以及接收被重写卡RC或卡片支架500反射的光的受光部。The card detection unit 176 is a sensor that detects whether the rewrite card RC is held on the card holder 500. The card detection unit 176 includes, for example, a light emitting unit that emits light to the rewrite card RC or the card holder 500 and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected by the rewrite card RC or the card holder 500.
卡片检测部176被利用于由卡片有无判断部440实施的卡片支架500中有无卡片的判断。卡片有无判断部440根据卡片检测部176的受光部所接收的光的颜色，检测重写卡RC是否被保持在卡片支架500中。The card detection unit 176 is used for the card presence determination unit 440 to determine whether a card is present in the card holder 500. The card presence determination unit 440 detects whether the rewrite card RC is held in the card holder 500 based on the color of light received by the light receiving unit of the card detection unit 176.
在此，也存在卡片支架500中保持有与被输送到显示变更装置250的重写卡RC不同的其他重写卡RC这一可能性。假如其他重写卡RC被保持在卡片支架500中并且被输送到显示变更装置250的重写卡RC未被返回到卡片支架500，则成为仅其他重写卡RC被保持在卡片支架500中的状态。其他重写卡RC显示有与应提供被发出至具备卡片支架500的托盘600中的药剂的患者不同的其他患者信息的可能性较大。在该情况下，发出至托盘600的药剂会根据其他重写卡RC的显示信息，被提供给与本应提供的患者不同的其他患者，这将成为大问题。Here, there is a possibility that another rewrite card RC different from the rewrite card RC conveyed to the display change device 250 is held in the card holder 500. If the other rewrite card RC is held in the card holder 500 and the rewrite card RC conveyed to the display change device 250 is not returned to the card holder 500, only the other rewrite card RC is held in the card holder 500. It is highly likely that the other rewrite card RC displays information of another patient different from the patient to whom the medicine dispensed to the tray 600 provided with the card holder 500 should be provided. In this case, the medicine dispensed to the tray 600 is provided to another patient different from the patient to whom it should be provided, based on the information displayed on the other rewrite card RC, which is a big problem.
因此，在利用显示变更装置250变更重写卡RC的显示信息的期间，卡片有无判断部440也可以利用卡片检测部176执行卡片支架500中是否保持有与该重写卡RC不同的其他重写卡RC的检测动作。另外，上述“变更重写卡RC的显示信息的期间”中也可以包含下述期间：即，通过卡片输送装置200将被载置在卡片载置部210上的重写卡RC从卡片载置部210输送至显示变更装置250为止的期间。另外，也可以包含下述期间：即，通过卡片输送装置200将由显示变更装置250变更了显示信息的重写卡RC，从显示变更装置250输送至卡片载置部210为止的期间。Therefore, during the period when the display information of the rewrite card RC is changed by the display change device 250, the card presence/absence determination unit 440 may also perform a detection operation of whether another rewrite card RC different from the rewrite card RC is held in the card holder 500 by the card detection unit 176. In addition, the above-mentioned "period when the display information of the rewrite card RC is changed" may also include the period from when the rewrite card RC placed on the card loading unit 210 is transported from the card loading unit 210 to the display change device 250 by the card transport device 200. In addition, the period from when the rewrite card RC whose display information is changed by the display change device 250 is transported from the display change device 250 to the card loading unit 210 by the card transport device 200 may also be included.
在执行上述检测动作时，移动控制部420以使卡片检测部176面对卡片支架500的方式，使支撑部161移动。当卡片支架500中未保持有上述其他重写卡RC时，卡片检测部176不检测该重写卡RC。另一方面，当卡片支架500中保持有上述其他重写卡RC时，卡片检测部176检测重写卡RC。因此，卡片有无判断部440能够通过卡片检测部176的检测来判断卡片支架500中是否保持有不需要的重写卡RC。When performing the above detection operation, the movement control unit 420 moves the support unit 161 in such a manner that the card detection unit 176 faces the card holder 500. When the card holder 500 does not hold the above-mentioned other rewrite card RC, the card detection unit 176 does not detect the rewrite card RC. On the other hand, when the card holder 500 holds the above-mentioned other rewrite card RC, the card detection unit 176 detects the rewrite card RC. Therefore, the card presence judgment unit 440 can judge whether the card holder 500 holds an unnecessary rewrite card RC through the detection of the card detection unit 176.
当卡片有无判断部440判断为卡片支架500中保持有上述其他重写卡RC时，控制装置400停止卡片信息变更单元100的动作。另外，触摸面板控制部470在触摸面板70上显示保持有其他重写卡RC这一情况。另一方面，当卡片有无判断部440判断为卡片支架500中未保持有上述其他重写卡RC时，移动控制部420以使卡片吸附部151等面对卡片载置部210的方式，使支撑部161移动。即，移动控制部420以能够吸附被从显示变更装置250返回的重写卡RC的方式，使支撑部161移动。When the card presence/absence determination unit 440 determines that the card holder 500 holds the other rewrite card RC, the control device 400 stops the operation of the card information change unit 100. In addition, the touch panel control unit 470 displays the fact that the other rewrite card RC is held on the touch panel 70. On the other hand, when the card presence/absence determination unit 440 determines that the card holder 500 does not hold the other rewrite card RC, the movement control unit 420 moves the support unit 161 in such a manner that the card adsorption unit 151 and the like face the card loading unit 210. That is, the movement control unit 420 moves the support unit 161 in such a manner that the rewrite card RC returned from the display change device 250 can be adsorbed.
引导部152和153引导卡片吸附部151所吸附的重写卡RC。引导部152和153相对于卡片吸附部151设置在重写卡RC的表面方向的两侧。通过如此设置引导部152和153，卡片装卸装置150能够将重写卡RC以引导部152和153作为支点进行弯曲。换言之，引导部152和153作为将卡片吸附部151所吸附的重写卡RC弯曲时的支点发挥作用。The guides 152 and 153 guide the rewrite card RC adsorbed by the card adsorption portion 151. The guides 152 and 153 are provided on both sides of the surface direction of the rewrite card RC with respect to the card adsorption portion 151. By providing the guides 152 and 153 in this way, the card loading and unloading device 150 can bend the rewrite card RC with the guides 152 and 153 as fulcrums. In other words, the guides 152 and 153 function as fulcrums when bending the rewrite card RC adsorbed by the card adsorption portion 151.
引导部152和153分别具备辊154和155，辊154和155通过旋转而辅助重写卡RC向上述垂直方向的移动。辊154和155具有相互平行且平行于重写卡RC表面的旋转轴。通过在引导部152和153分别与重写卡RC接触的状态下，使辊154和155进行旋转，从而能够顺利地使重写卡RC弯曲。The guides 152 and 153 are provided with rollers 154 and 155, respectively, and the rollers 154 and 155 assist the movement of the rewrite card RC in the vertical direction by rotating. The rollers 154 and 155 have rotation axes parallel to each other and parallel to the surface of the rewrite card RC. By rotating the rollers 154 and 155 while the guides 152 and 153 are in contact with the rewrite card RC, the rewrite card RC can be smoothly bent.
另外，辊154和155也可以分别被从卡片吸附部151脱离并与载置在卡片载置部210上的重写卡RC抵接。该情况下，辊154和155分别辅助重写卡RC朝向下述方向的移动，即，由卡片输送装置200实施的重写卡RC的输送方向。通过预先使辊154和155与载置在卡片载置部210上的重写卡RC抵接，从而在从卡片载置部210向显示变更装置250输送重写卡RC时，利用辊154和155的旋转辅助该输送。因此，能够更顺畅地进行该输送。In addition, the rollers 154 and 155 may be separated from the card adsorption portion 151 and abutted against the rewrite card RC placed on the card placement portion 210. In this case, the rollers 154 and 155 assist the movement of the rewrite card RC in the following direction, that is, the conveyance direction of the rewrite card RC by the card conveying device 200. By making the rollers 154 and 155 abut against the rewrite card RC placed on the card placement portion 210 in advance, when the rewrite card RC is conveyed from the card placement portion 210 to the display change device 250, the rotation of the rollers 154 and 155 assists the conveyance. Therefore, the conveyance can be performed more smoothly.
另外，引导部152和153各自均在与重写卡RC接触的接触面的至少一部分上设有缓冲部件，该缓冲部件用于缓和重写卡RC接触时的冲击。在本实施方式中，引导部152和153作为缓冲部件分别具备O形圈156和157。引导部152和153分别与重写卡RC接触时，是利用O形圈156和157进行接触。因此，抑制了引导部152和153接触重写卡RC时的撞击声，另外减轻了对重写卡RC以及引导部152和153施加的负荷。另外，关于缓冲部件的形状，并不限于如O形圈156和157那样仅在引导部152和153的一部分上设置的形状，也可以包覆引导部152和153的整体。In addition, each of the guides 152 and 153 is provided with a buffer component on at least a portion of the contact surface with the rewrite card RC, and the buffer component is used to mitigate the impact when the rewrite card RC contacts. In this embodiment, the guides 152 and 153 are provided with O-rings 156 and 157 as buffer components. When the guides 152 and 153 contact the rewrite card RC, they use the O-rings 156 and 157 to make contact. Therefore, the impact sound when the guides 152 and 153 contact the rewrite card RC is suppressed, and the load applied to the rewrite card RC and the guides 152 and 153 is reduced. In addition, the shape of the buffer component is not limited to the shape provided only on a portion of the guides 152 and 153 like the O-rings 156 and 157, and it can also cover the entire guides 152 and 153.
支撑部161是以能够沿上述垂直方向移动的方式支撑卡片吸附部151以及引导部152和153的部件。具体而言，支撑部161具备分别支撑引导部152和153的支撑轴162和163。支撑轴162和163在上述垂直方向上沿着从支撑部161朝向重写卡RC的方向延伸。支撑轴162和163支撑引导部152和153，使得引导部152和153相对于支撑部161能够沿上述垂直方向彼此独立地移动。The support portion 161 is a component that supports the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 in a manner that allows them to move in the vertical direction. Specifically, the support portion 161 includes support shafts 162 and 163 that respectively support the guide portions 152 and 153. The support shafts 162 and 163 extend in the vertical direction from the support portion 161 toward the rewrite card RC. The support shafts 162 and 163 support the guide portions 152 and 153 so that the guide portions 152 and 153 can move independently of each other in the vertical direction relative to the support portion 161.
如上所述，Z轴电动机173通过使支撑部161移动而移动卡片吸附部151。因此，Z轴电动机173使引导部152和153也与卡片吸附部151一起在上述垂直方向上移动。根据该结构，移动控制部420仅控制Z轴电动机173即可，因此，与例如另外设有用于使引导部152和153移动的电动机的结构相比，能够简化处理。As described above, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the card adsorption unit 151 by moving the support unit 161. Therefore, the Z-axis motor 173 also moves the guide units 152 and 153 in the vertical direction together with the card adsorption unit 151. According to this structure, the movement control unit 420 only needs to control the Z-axis motor 173, so that the processing can be simplified compared with a structure in which, for example, a motor for moving the guide units 152 and 153 is separately provided.
支撑轴162和163上分别设置有弹簧164和165(伸缩部件)，弹簧164和165分别随着引导部152和153的移动而伸展或收缩。由此，能够对重写卡RC施加与卡片吸附部151提供的吸附力相反方向侧的力。另外，如上所述，由于支撑轴162和163彼此独立地移动，因此，弹簧164和165彼此独立地伸缩。因此，即使在引导部152和153至卡片支架500或卡片载置部210为止的距离不同的情况下，通过利用Z轴电动机173使引导部152和153移动，也能够使引导部152和153双方与重写卡RC抵接。Springs 164 and 165 (retractable parts) are provided on the support shafts 162 and 163, respectively, and the springs 164 and 165 are extended or contracted as the guide parts 152 and 153 move. Thus, a force in the opposite direction to the adsorption force provided by the card adsorption part 151 can be applied to the rewrite card RC. In addition, as described above, since the support shafts 162 and 163 move independently of each other, the springs 164 and 165 are extended and contracted independently of each other. Therefore, even if the distances from the guide parts 152 and 153 to the card holder 500 or the card loading part 210 are different, by moving the guide parts 152 and 153 using the Z-axis motor 173, both the guide parts 152 and 153 can be brought into contact with the rewrite card RC.
在弹簧164和165为自然长度的状态下，引导部152和153被支撑在比卡片吸附部151更远离支撑部161的位置。因此，当支撑部161朝向重写卡RC(即，朝向上述第一方向)移动时，引导部152和153在卡片吸附部151之前先与重写卡RC抵接。当卡片吸附部151在引导部152和153与重写卡RC抵接的状态下，进一步向重写卡RC移动时，弹簧164和165被压缩，卡片吸附部151与重写卡RC抵接。另一方面，当在卡片吸附部151吸附着重写卡RC的状态下，支撑部161朝向上述第二方向移动时，卡片吸附部151与支撑部161一起移动。另一方面，即使支撑部161向上述第二方向移动，在被压缩的弹簧164和165恢复为自然长度(原始状态)之前，引导部152和153也不会相对于卡片支架500或卡片载置部210进行移动。其结果是，卡片吸附部151相对于引导部152和153呈拉入的状态，因此，卡片装卸装置150能够使被吸附的重写卡RC弯曲。另外，能够以该状态保持重写卡RC。When the springs 164 and 165 are at their natural lengths, the guides 152 and 153 are supported at a position farther from the support portion 161 than the card adsorption portion 151. Therefore, when the support portion 161 moves toward the rewrite card RC (i.e., toward the first direction mentioned above), the guides 152 and 153 abut against the rewrite card RC before the card adsorption portion 151. When the card adsorption portion 151 moves further toward the rewrite card RC with the guides 152 and 153 abutting against the rewrite card RC, the springs 164 and 165 are compressed, and the card adsorption portion 151 abuts against the rewrite card RC. On the other hand, when the support portion 161 moves toward the second direction mentioned above with the card adsorption portion 151 adsorbing the rewrite card RC, the card adsorption portion 151 moves together with the support portion 161. On the other hand, even if the support portion 161 moves in the second direction, the guide portions 152 and 153 do not move relative to the card holder 500 or the card loading portion 210 until the compressed springs 164 and 165 return to their natural lengths (original state). As a result, the card adsorption portion 151 is pulled in relative to the guide portions 152 and 153, so that the card loading and unloading device 150 can bend the adsorbed rewrite card RC. In addition, the rewrite card RC can be held in this state.
如上所述，至少由引导部152和153、支撑部161、支撑轴162和163、以及弹簧164和165，作为使被卡片吸附部151吸附的重写卡RC弯曲的弯曲机构发挥作用。例如，这些部件通过使重写卡RC弯曲，使得重写卡RC的外缘部位于上述间隙的入口附近。As described above, at least the guides 152 and 153, the support portion 161, the support shafts 162 and 163, and the springs 164 and 165 function as a bending mechanism for bending the rewrite card RC adsorbed by the card adsorption portion 151. For example, these components bend the rewrite card RC so that the outer edge of the rewrite card RC is located near the entrance of the gap.
而且，如上所述，Z轴电动机173通过使支撑部161移动，使被弯曲状态的重写卡RC沿上述第一方向移动，由此将上述外缘部插入上述间隙中。另外，在本实施方式中，如上所述，Z轴电动机173通过使支撑部161移动，使被弯曲状态的重写卡RC沿上述第二方向移动，由此将上述外缘部从上述间隙中拔出。即，本实施方式的Z轴电动机173兼具将上述外缘部插入上述间隙中的卡片插入功能和将上述外缘部从上述间隙中拔出的卡片拔出功能。Furthermore, as described above, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the support portion 161 to move the rewrite card RC in the bent state in the first direction, thereby inserting the outer edge portion into the gap. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the support portion 161 to move the rewrite card RC in the bent state in the second direction, thereby pulling the outer edge portion out of the gap. That is, the Z-axis motor 173 of the present embodiment has both a card insertion function of inserting the outer edge portion into the gap and a card extraction function of pulling the outer edge portion out of the gap.
图6是表示卡片装卸装置150所具备的位置传感器的图。在图6中，适当省略了支撑位置传感器的部件。如图6所示，卡片装卸装置150具有第一Z轴极限传感器181、第二Z轴极限传感器182、第一θ轴极限传感器183、以及第二θ轴极限传感器184。只要是能够检测卡片吸附部151位置的位置，这些位置传感器便可以配置在任意位置。在以下的说明中，对于Z轴方向，将在进行重写卡RC的装卸动作时朝向卡片支架500或卡片载置部210的方向设定为正方向。另外，对于θ轴方向，将从卡片支架500的方向朝向卡片载置部210的方向的旋转方向设定为正方向。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the position sensor provided in the card loading and unloading device 150. In FIG. 6 , components supporting the position sensor are appropriately omitted. As shown in FIG. 6 , the card loading and unloading device 150 has a first Z-axis limit sensor 181, a second Z-axis limit sensor 182, a first θ-axis limit sensor 183, and a second θ-axis limit sensor 184. These position sensors can be arranged at any position as long as they are positions capable of detecting the position of the card adsorption portion 151. In the following description, for the Z-axis direction, the direction toward the card holder 500 or the card loading portion 210 when performing the loading and unloading operation of the rewrite card RC is set as the positive direction. In addition, for the θ-axis direction, the rotation direction from the direction of the card holder 500 toward the direction of the card loading portion 210 is set as the positive direction.
第一Z轴极限传感器181是：当卡片吸附部151到达了Z轴方向上的移动范围的上限时，向移动控制部420输出信号的传感器。当被输入了来自第一Z轴极限传感器181的信号时，移动控制部420停止卡片吸附部151向Z轴方向的正方向的移动。The first Z-axis limit sensor 181 is a sensor that outputs a signal to the movement control unit 420 when the card adsorption unit 151 reaches the upper limit of the movement range in the Z-axis direction. When the signal from the first Z-axis limit sensor 181 is input, the movement control unit 420 stops the movement of the card adsorption unit 151 in the positive direction of the Z-axis direction.
第二Z轴极限传感器182是：当卡片吸附部151到达了Z轴方向上的移动范围的下限时，向移动控制部420输出信号的传感器。当被输入了来自第二Z轴极限传感器182的信号时，移动控制部420停止卡片吸附部151向Z轴方向的负方向的移动。另外，在卡片装卸装置150的动作开始时，卡片吸附部151向Z轴方向的负方向移动，直到第二Z轴极限传感器182输出信号为止，并且以第二Z轴极限传感器182输出信号的位置为基准向待机位置移动。The second Z-axis limit sensor 182 is a sensor that outputs a signal to the movement control unit 420 when the card adsorption unit 151 reaches the lower limit of the movement range in the Z-axis direction. When the signal from the second Z-axis limit sensor 182 is input, the movement control unit 420 stops the movement of the card adsorption unit 151 in the negative direction of the Z-axis direction. In addition, when the card loading and unloading device 150 starts to operate, the card adsorption unit 151 moves in the negative direction of the Z-axis direction until the second Z-axis limit sensor 182 outputs a signal, and moves to the standby position based on the position where the second Z-axis limit sensor 182 outputs a signal.
第一θ轴极限传感器183是：当卡片吸附部151到达了θ轴方向上的旋转范围的上限时，输出信号的传感器。当第一θ轴极限传感器183输出了信号时，卡片吸附部151停止朝向下述方向的旋转，即，从面对卡片支架500的方向朝向面对卡片载置部210的方向这一方向。The first θ-axis limit sensor 183 is a sensor that outputs a signal when the card adsorption unit 151 reaches the upper limit of the rotation range in the θ-axis direction. When the first θ-axis limit sensor 183 outputs a signal, the card adsorption unit 151 stops rotating in the direction from the direction facing the card holder 500 to the direction facing the card loading unit 210.
第二θ轴极限传感器184是：当卡片吸附部151到达了θ轴方向上的旋转范围的下限时输出信号的传感器。当第二θ轴极限传感器184输出了信号时，卡片吸附部151停止朝向下述方向的旋转，即，从面对卡片载置部210的方向朝向面对卡片支架500的方向这一方向。另外，在卡片装卸装置150的动作开始时，卡片吸附部151进行旋转直到第二θ轴极限传感器184输出信号为止，并以第二θ轴极限传感器184输出信号的位置为基准向待机位置旋转。The second θ-axis limit sensor 184 is a sensor that outputs a signal when the card adsorption unit 151 reaches the lower limit of the rotation range in the θ-axis direction. When the second θ-axis limit sensor 184 outputs a signal, the card adsorption unit 151 stops rotating in the direction from the direction facing the card loading unit 210 to the direction facing the card holder 500. In addition, when the card loading and unloading device 150 starts to operate, the card adsorption unit 151 rotates until the second θ-axis limit sensor 184 outputs a signal, and rotates to the standby position based on the position where the second θ-axis limit sensor 184 outputs a signal.
上述待机位置是指成为卡片吸附部151等移动的基准的位置。移动控制部420利用作为步进电动机的Z轴电动机173和θ轴电动机174并以待机位置为基准，对卡片吸附部151等的位置进行控制。其中，在由于不良情况而卡片吸附部151等移动到不希望的位置时，由第一Z轴极限传感器181、第二Z轴极限传感器182、第一θ轴极限传感器183或第二θ轴极限传感器184对卡片吸附部151等进行检测，并使其移动停止。The standby position is a position that serves as a reference for the movement of the card adsorption unit 151, etc. The movement control unit 420 uses the Z-axis motor 173 and the θ-axis motor 174, which are stepping motors, to control the position of the card adsorption unit 151, etc. with the standby position as a reference. When the card adsorption unit 151, etc. moves to an undesirable position due to an adverse condition, the first Z-axis limit sensor 181, the second Z-axis limit sensor 182, the first θ-axis limit sensor 183, or the second θ-axis limit sensor 184 detects the card adsorption unit 151, etc. and stops its movement.
图7是表示卡片输送装置200的结构的图。如图7中所示，卡片输送装置200具备卡片载置部210、传送带220、第一传感器230以及第二传感器240。FIG7 is a diagram showing the structure of the card transport device 200. As shown in FIG7, the card transport device 200 includes a card placement unit 210, a conveyor belt 220, a first sensor 230, and a second sensor 240.
卡片载置部210是载置重写卡RC的载置台。卡片载置部210具有：能够实现重写卡RC的装卸的开口部211、载置重写卡RC的底部212、与底部212连接并形成开口部211的侧壁213。The card placement section 210 is a placement table for placing the rewrite card RC and includes an opening 211 for loading and unloading the rewrite card RC, a bottom 212 for placing the rewrite card RC, and a side wall 213 connected to the bottom 212 and forming the opening 211 .
在本实施方式中，侧壁213相对于底部212呈大致垂直地立起，侧壁213的至少一部分相对于传送带220的输送方向倾斜。具体地，如图7中所示，在俯视卡片载置部210时，作为侧壁213的一部分的侧壁214相对于上述输送方向倾斜，并设置成使开口部211的角部呈大致曲线形状(大致C形)。换言之，侧壁214以下述方式设置于卡片载置部210的角部，即：在设置有第一传感器230及第二传感器240的短边侧区域中，朝向规定方向，使开口部211的与该方向大致垂直方向的宽度变短。此处的规定方向是指：在重写卡RC边弯曲边被插入时重写卡RC延伸的方向。In the present embodiment, the side wall 213 stands substantially vertically relative to the bottom 212, and at least a portion of the side wall 213 is inclined relative to the conveying direction of the conveyor belt 220. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, when the card loading section 210 is viewed from above, the side wall 214, which is a portion of the side wall 213, is inclined relative to the above-mentioned conveying direction, and is arranged so that the corner of the opening 211 is substantially curved (substantially C-shaped). In other words, the side wall 214 is arranged at the corner of the card loading section 210 in the following manner: in the short side area where the first sensor 230 and the second sensor 240 are arranged, the width of the opening 211 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction is shortened toward a prescribed direction. The prescribed direction here refers to the direction in which the rewrite card RC extends when the rewrite card RC is inserted while being bent.
进一步换言之，侧壁213和侧壁214限定了安装重写卡RC的区域(即，俯视时的开口部211)。而且，开口部211的角部(即，侧壁214)形成为：在俯视卡片载置部210时，在开口部211的端部处，朝向规定方向，使与该方向垂直的方向的宽度变短。此处的规定方向是指：在重写卡RC边弯曲边被从卡片载置部210的正面安装时，重写卡RC延伸的方向。在本例中，上述开口部211的端部是卡片载置部210的两个短边侧的区域。In other words, the side wall 213 and the side wall 214 define the area where the rewrite card RC is installed (i.e., the opening 211 when viewed from above). Moreover, the corners of the opening 211 (i.e., the side wall 214) are formed so that when the card loading section 210 is viewed from above, at the ends of the opening 211, the width in a direction perpendicular to a predetermined direction becomes shorter. The predetermined direction here refers to the direction in which the rewrite card RC extends when the rewrite card RC is installed from the front of the card loading section 210 while being bent. In this example, the ends of the above-mentioned opening 211 are the areas on the two short sides of the card loading section 210.
通过设置如上所述的侧壁214，在呈被卡片吸附部151吸附状态的重写卡RC被交接至卡片载置部210时，即使重写卡RC的位置从开口部211稍微偏离，在重写卡RC被载置于卡片载置部210的过程中，也被侧壁214引导而被载置在准确的位置。即，侧壁214具有与后述的卡片引导部515(参照图16)相同的功能。另外，侧壁213也可以构成为：不相对于底部212呈大致垂直地立起，而是从上部(开口部211)朝向底部212倾斜。By providing the side wall 214 as described above, when the rewrite card RC in the state of being adsorbed by the card adsorption portion 151 is delivered to the card loading portion 210, even if the position of the rewrite card RC is slightly deviated from the opening portion 211, the rewrite card RC is guided by the side wall 214 and loaded at an accurate position during the process of being loaded on the card loading portion 210. That is, the side wall 214 has the same function as the card guide portion 515 (refer to FIG. 16 ) described later. In addition, the side wall 213 can also be configured to be not substantially vertically erected relative to the bottom 212, but inclined from the upper portion (opening portion 211) toward the bottom 212.
以下，进一步详细地说明侧壁214对重写卡RC的引导。在以下的说明中，将形成开口部211的侧壁中的除侧壁214之外的部分(即，相对于传送带220的输送方向不倾斜的侧壁)称为侧壁213。In the following description, the side wall forming the opening 211 except the side wall 214 (ie, the side wall not inclined with respect to the conveying direction of the conveyor 220 ) is referred to as the side wall 213 .
开口部211的高度方向(与重写卡RC的短边对应的方向)的长度比重写卡RC的短边方向的长度长。因此，当利用卡片吸附部151进行的重写卡RC的载置位置为底部212上的准确位置时，重写卡RC与侧壁213及214不接触。The length of the opening 211 in the height direction (the direction corresponding to the short side of the rewrite card RC) is longer than the length of the short side of the rewrite card RC. Therefore, when the rewrite card RC is placed at an accurate position on the bottom 212 by the card adsorption portion 151, the rewrite card RC does not contact the side walls 213 and 214.
当利用卡片吸附部151进行的重写卡RC的载置位置是从底部212上的准确位置向开口部211的高度方向偏离了的位置时，弯曲状态的重写卡RC的角部RCc(圆弧状的部分)首先与侧壁213接触。然后，随着重写卡RC接近底部212，角部RCc被侧壁213引导，同时重写卡RC的短边与底部212接触，进而，在这之后，在重写卡RC从弯曲状态返回至原来状态的过程中，角部RCc进一步被侧壁214引导，由此重写卡RC被引导至底部212上的准确位置。另外，在利用卡片吸附部151进行的重写卡RC的载置位置的、自底部212上的准确位置的偏离较小时，弯曲状态的重写卡RC的角部RCc与侧壁213不接触，而是仅与侧壁214接触。When the placement position of the rewrite card RC by the card adsorption part 151 is a position deviated from the accurate position on the bottom 212 in the height direction of the opening 211, the corner RCc (arc-shaped portion) of the rewrite card RC in the bent state first contacts the side wall 213. Then, as the rewrite card RC approaches the bottom 212, the corner RCc is guided by the side wall 213, and the short side of the rewrite card RC contacts the bottom 212. Then, after that, in the process of the rewrite card RC returning from the bent state to the original state, the corner RCc is further guided by the side wall 214, thereby guiding the rewrite card RC to the accurate position on the bottom 212. In addition, when the placement position of the rewrite card RC by the card adsorption part 151 is less deviated from the accurate position on the bottom 212, the corner RCc of the rewrite card RC in the bent state does not contact the side wall 213, but contacts only the side wall 214.
另外，在自上述准确位置的偏离大至弯曲状态的重写卡RC的角部RCc不与侧壁213接触的程度时，则无法利用侧壁213及214引导重写卡RC。另外，在从上述准确位置向左右方向(与重写卡RC的长边对应的方向)偏离时，也无法利用侧壁213及214引导重写卡RC。Furthermore, when the deviation from the above-mentioned accurate position is so great that the corner RCc of the rewrite card RC in the bent state does not contact the side wall 213, the rewrite card RC cannot be guided by the side walls 213 and 214. Furthermore, when the rewrite card RC deviates from the above-mentioned accurate position in the left-right direction (the direction corresponding to the long side of the rewrite card RC), the rewrite card RC cannot be guided by the side walls 213 and 214.
传送带220将载置在卡片载置部210上的重写卡RC输送到显示变更装置250。另外，传送带220将由显示变更装置250重写了显示信息后的重写卡RC输送至卡片载置部210。传送带220由控制装置400的卡片输送控制部450控制。The conveyor 220 conveys the rewrite card RC placed on the card placement unit 210 to the display change device 250. In addition, the conveyor 220 conveys the rewrite card RC after the display information is rewritten by the display change device 250 to the card placement unit 210. The conveyor 220 is controlled by the card conveyance control unit 450 of the control device 400.
第一传感器230和第二传感器240是对存在于自身正上方的重写卡RC进行检测的传感器。第一传感器230相对于卡片载置部210设置在显示变更装置250侧。第二传感器240相对于卡片载置部210设置在与显示变更装置250相反的一侧。第二传感器240具有发光部和受光部，该发光部和受光部被设置为将载置于卡片载置部210的重写卡RC的端部夹持。通过该发光部和受光部，卡片载置部210具有在保持有重写卡RC的状态下其外缘部的一部分应被插入其中的间隙。The first sensor 230 and the second sensor 240 are sensors for detecting the rewrite card RC present just above the first sensor 230. The first sensor 230 is provided on the display change device 250 side relative to the card loading section 210. The second sensor 240 is provided on the side opposite to the display change device 250 relative to the card loading section 210. The second sensor 240 has a light emitting section and a light receiving section, and the light emitting section and the light receiving section are provided to clamp the end of the rewrite card RC loaded on the card loading section 210. The card loading section 210 has a gap through the light emitting section and the light receiving section into which a part of the outer edge portion of the rewrite card RC should be inserted when the rewrite card RC is held.
第一传感器230被使用于供卡片输送控制部450确认重写卡RC已被从卡片载置部210恰当地输送到显示变更装置250。在利用输送带220将重写卡RC从卡片载置部210向显示变更装置250输送时，由第一传感器230检测的检测信号，从表示检测到重写卡RC的信号变为表示未检测到重写卡RC的信号。在信号如此发生了变化时，卡片输送控制部450确认重写卡RC已被从卡片载置部210恰当地输送到显示变更装置250。The first sensor 230 is used for the card transport control unit 450 to confirm that the rewrite card RC has been properly transported from the card loading unit 210 to the display changing device 250. When the rewrite card RC is transported from the card loading unit 210 to the display changing device 250 by the conveyor belt 220, the detection signal detected by the first sensor 230 changes from a signal indicating that the rewrite card RC is detected to a signal indicating that the rewrite card RC is not detected. When the signal changes in this way, the card transport control unit 450 confirms that the rewrite card RC has been properly transported from the card loading unit 210 to the display changing device 250.
第二传感器240被使用于供卡片输送控制部450确认重写卡RC已被从显示变更装置250恰当地输送到卡片载置部210。在将重写卡RC从显示变更装置250向卡片载置部210输送时，由第二传感器240检测的检测信号，从表示未检测到重写卡RC的信号变为表示检测到重写卡RC的信号。在信号如此发生了变化时，卡片输送控制部450确认重写卡RC已被从显示变更装置250恰当地输送到卡片载置部210。The second sensor 240 is used for the card transport control unit 450 to confirm that the rewrite card RC has been properly transported from the display change device 250 to the card loading unit 210. When the rewrite card RC is transported from the display change device 250 to the card loading unit 210, the detection signal detected by the second sensor 240 changes from a signal indicating that the rewrite card RC is not detected to a signal indicating that the rewrite card RC is detected. When the signal changes in this way, the card transport control unit 450 confirms that the rewrite card RC has been properly transported from the display change device 250 to the card loading unit 210.
在卡片输送控制部450确认了重写卡RC已被从显示变更装置250恰当地输送到卡片载置部210之后，电磁阀控制部430使电磁阀172接通(ON)。由此，可减少输送中的重写卡RC误被卡片吸附部151吸附的可能性。After the card transport control unit 450 confirms that the rewrite card RC has been properly transported from the display changing device 250 to the card loading unit 210 , the solenoid valve control unit 430 turns on the solenoid valve 172 . This reduces the possibility that the rewrite card RC being transported is erroneously sucked by the card sucking unit 151 .
另外，卡片输送装置200也可以不具备第一传感器230和第二传感器240中的一者或两者。该情况下，卡片输送控制部450例如通过卡片装卸装置150的卡片检测部176确认卡片载置部210中是否存在重写卡RC。The card transport device 200 may not include one or both of the first sensor 230 and the second sensor 240 . In this case, the card transport control unit 450 checks whether the rewritable card RC is in the card loading unit 210 through the card detection unit 176 of the card loading and unloading device 150 .
另外，通过卡片吸附部151吸附重写卡RC用的真空泵的排气路径也可以连接于显示变更装置250。该情况下，能够通过真空泵的排气而除去显示变更装置250内的灰尘。In addition, the exhaust path of the vacuum pump for sucking the rewrite card RC by the card sucking section 151 may be connected to the display changing device 250. In this case, dust in the display changing device 250 can be removed by the exhaust of the vacuum pump.
图8是将重写卡RC收纳于卡片支架500中时的卡片吸附部151的侧视图。在图8中，重写卡RC呈被引导部152和153引导而弯曲的状态。其中，为了简化，在图8中省略了引导部152和153。Fig. 8 is a side view of the card adsorption portion 151 when the rewrite card RC is accommodated in the card holder 500. In Fig. 8, the rewrite card RC is bent by being guided by the guide portions 152 and 153. However, the guide portions 152 and 153 are omitted in Fig. 8 for simplicity.
如图8中所示，卡片吸附部151具备具有波纹形状的波纹部158。因此，卡片吸附部151能够在与重写卡RC垂直的方向上位移。因此，在通过卡片引导部515(参照图16中的16001)引导上述重写卡RC的角部RCc而重写卡RC发生了位移的情况下，可减少重写卡RC从卡片吸附部151脱离的可能性。As shown in FIG8 , the card adsorption portion 151 has a corrugated portion 158 having a corrugated shape. Therefore, the card adsorption portion 151 can be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rewrite card RC. Therefore, when the rewrite card RC is displaced by guiding the corner RCc of the rewrite card RC by the card guide portion 515 (refer to 16001 in FIG16 ), the possibility of the rewrite card RC being separated from the card adsorption portion 151 can be reduced.
<卡片信息变更单元的动作例><Operation Example of Card Information Changing Unit>
图9是表示从卡片支架500中拔除重写卡RC时的卡片装卸装置150的动作例的图。参照图9，对从卡片支架500中拔除卡片时的卡片装卸装置150的动作例进行说明。Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the card loading and unloading device 150 when the rewrite card RC is removed from the card holder 500. Referring to Fig. 9, an example of the operation of the card loading and unloading device 150 when the card is removed from the card holder 500 will be described.
在图9所示的动作例中，首先，移动控制部420使卡片吸附部151移动到初始位置。初始位置是指：由第二Z轴极限传感器182和第二θ轴极限传感器184检测卡片吸附部151的位置。接着，如图9中的9001所示，移动控制部420使卡片吸附部151从初始位置向在Z轴方向上与初始位置仅分离规定距离的待机位置移动。在该状态下，电磁阀控制部430使电磁阀172接通(ON)。In the operation example shown in FIG9 , first, the movement control unit 420 moves the card adsorption unit 151 to the initial position. The initial position refers to the position of the card adsorption unit 151 detected by the second Z-axis limit sensor 182 and the second θ-axis limit sensor 184. Next, as shown in 9001 in FIG9 , the movement control unit 420 moves the card adsorption unit 151 from the initial position to a standby position separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance in the Z-axis direction. In this state, the solenoid valve control unit 430 turns on the solenoid valve 172.
接下来，当移动控制部420使卡片吸附部151朝向重写卡RC移动时，如图9中的9002所示，引导部152和153先与重写卡RC抵接。当移动控制部420进一步使卡片吸附部151移动时，如图9中的9003所示，弹簧164和165被压缩，卡片吸附部151、引导部152和153与重写卡RC抵接。此时，重写卡RC被卡片吸附部151吸附。Next, when the movement control unit 420 moves the card adsorption unit 151 toward the rewrite card RC, as shown in 9002 in FIG. 9 , the guide units 152 and 153 first come into contact with the rewrite card RC. When the movement control unit 420 further moves the card adsorption unit 151, as shown in 9003 in FIG. 9 , the springs 164 and 165 are compressed, and the card adsorption unit 151, the guide units 152 and 153 come into contact with the rewrite card RC. At this time, the rewrite card RC is adsorbed by the card adsorption unit 151.
在通过吸附确认传感器175确认了重写卡RC的吸附之后，如图9中的9004所示，移动控制部420使卡片吸附部151向远离卡片支架500的方向移动。此时，在弹簧164和165的弹力的作用下，引导部152和153保持与重写卡RC抵接的状态不变，因此，重写卡RC呈被引导部152和153引导而被弯曲的状态。After the adsorption of the rewrite card RC is confirmed by the adsorption confirmation sensor 175, as shown in 9004 in FIG9 , the movement control unit 420 moves the card adsorption unit 151 in a direction away from the card holder 500. At this time, under the elastic force of the springs 164 and 165, the guides 152 and 153 remain in contact with the rewrite card RC, so the rewrite card RC is guided by the guides 152 and 153 and bent.
若移动控制部420进一步使卡片吸附部151向远离卡片支架500的方向移动，则如图9中的9005所示，重写卡RC被从卡片支架500中拔出。在这之后，如图9中的9006所示，移动控制部420使卡片装卸装置150旋转90°。由此，呈卡片装卸装置150与卡片输送装置200的卡片载置部210相对的状态。If the movement control unit 420 further moves the card adsorption unit 151 in a direction away from the card holder 500, the rewrite card RC is pulled out of the card holder 500 as shown in 9005 in FIG9 . After that, as shown in 9006 in FIG9 , the movement control unit 420 rotates the card loading and unloading device 150 by 90°. Thus, the card loading and unloading device 150 is in a state facing the card loading unit 210 of the card transport device 200.
图10是表示卡片装卸装置150将重写卡RC载置在卡片载置部210上的动作的图。在卡片装卸装置150刚旋转完之后，如图10中的10001所示，卡片吸附部151、引导部152和153与卡片载置部210分离。当移动控制部420使卡片吸附部151朝向卡片载置部210移动时，如图10中的10002所示，引导部152和153首先经由重写卡RC与卡片载置部210接触。当移动控制部420进一步使卡片吸附部151移动时，如图10中的10003所示，卡片吸附部151也经由重写卡RC与卡片载置部210接触。此时，重写卡RC呈未弯曲的状态。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the action of the card loading and unloading device 150 loading the rewrite card RC on the card loading section 210. Immediately after the card loading and unloading device 150 has been rotated, as shown by 10001 in FIG. 10, the card adsorption portion 151, the guide portions 152 and 153 are separated from the card loading section 210. When the movement control unit 420 moves the card adsorption portion 151 toward the card loading section 210, as shown by 10002 in FIG. 10, the guide portions 152 and 153 first contact the card loading section 210 via the rewrite card RC. When the movement control unit 420 further moves the card adsorption portion 151, as shown by 10003 in FIG. 10, the card adsorption portion 151 also contacts the card loading section 210 via the rewrite card RC. At this time, the rewrite card RC is in an unbent state.
当在该状态下，电磁阀控制部430将电磁阀172断开(OFF)时，如图10中的10004所示，重写卡RC被从卡片吸附部151释放。当移动控制部420使卡片吸附部151向远离卡片载置部210的方向移动时，如图10中的10005所示，卡片吸附部151、引导部152和153远离重写卡RC。在该状态下，卡片输送装置200将重写卡RC向显示变更装置250输送，显示变更装置250将重写卡RC的显示进行变更。When the solenoid valve control unit 430 turns off the solenoid valve 172 in this state, as shown by 10004 in FIG. 10 , the rewrite card RC is released from the card adsorption unit 151. When the movement control unit 420 moves the card adsorption unit 151 in a direction away from the card loading unit 210, as shown by 10005 in FIG. 10 , the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 are away from the rewrite card RC. In this state, the card transport device 200 transports the rewrite card RC to the display change device 250, and the display change device 250 changes the display of the rewrite card RC.
然而，在向卡片载置部210安装重写卡RC时，也可以省略图10中的10005的动作。具体而言，也可以构成为：在如图10中的10004所示，引导部152和153(具体是辊154和155)保持与被安装于卡片载置部210之后的重写卡RC抵接的状态下，卡片输送装置200将重写卡RC向显示变更装置250输送。也就是，移动控制部420使支撑部161移动成下述状态：即，在将重写卡RC安装于卡片载置部210上之后，引导部152和153与重写卡RC抵接并且卡片吸附部151离开重写卡RC的状态。该情况下，能够更顺利地进行重写卡RC从卡片载置部210向显示变更装置250的输送。However, when the rewrite card RC is mounted on the card loading section 210, the action of 10005 in FIG. 10 may be omitted. Specifically, the card transport device 200 may transport the rewrite card RC to the display changing device 250 while the guides 152 and 153 (specifically, the rollers 154 and 155) are in contact with the rewrite card RC mounted on the card loading section 210 as shown in 10004 in FIG. 10. That is, the movement control section 420 moves the support section 161 to a state in which the guides 152 and 153 are in contact with the rewrite card RC and the card adsorption section 151 is separated from the rewrite card RC after the rewrite card RC is mounted on the card loading section 210. In this case, the rewrite card RC can be transported from the card loading section 210 to the display changing device 250 more smoothly.
在显示变更装置250变更重写卡RC的显示的期间，卡片有无判断部440也可以如上所述执行卡片支架500中是否保持有与被拔除的重写卡RC不同的其他重写卡RC的检测动作。在执行该检测动作时，移动控制部420先使卡片装卸装置150旋转并返回与卡片支架500相对的位置。While the display changing device 250 is changing the display of the rewrite card RC, the card presence/absence determination unit 440 may also perform the detection operation as described above to determine whether another rewrite card RC different from the removed rewrite card RC is held in the card holder 500. When performing this detection operation, the movement control unit 420 first rotates the card loading and unloading device 150 and returns it to a position opposite to the card holder 500.
在上述检测动作之后，通过卡片有无判断部440判断为卡片支架500中未保持有其他重写卡RC时，移动控制部420使卡片装卸装置150旋转，并返回到图10中的10005的状态。但是，如上所述，当在图10的10004的状态下，重写卡RC被从卡片载置部210输送向显示变更装置250时，移动控制部420也可以使卡片装卸装置150旋转并返回到图10中的10004的状态。该情况下，通过辊154和155的旋转，能够辅助重写卡RC从显示变更装置250向卡片载置部210的输送。因此，也能够更顺利地进行该输送。After the above detection operation, when the card presence/absence determination unit 440 determines that no other rewrite card RC is held in the card holder 500, the movement control unit 420 rotates the card loading and unloading device 150 and returns to the state 10005 in FIG. 10. However, as described above, when the rewrite card RC is conveyed from the card loading unit 210 to the display change device 250 in the state 10004 in FIG. 10, the movement control unit 420 may rotate the card loading and unloading device 150 and return to the state 10004 in FIG. 10. In this case, the conveyance of the rewrite card RC from the display change device 250 to the card loading unit 210 can be assisted by the rotation of the rollers 154 and 155. Therefore, the conveyance can also be performed more smoothly.
另外，关于卡片装卸装置150从卡片载置部210拔除重写卡RC的动作，由于该动作与参照图9说明的从卡片支架500拔除重写卡RC的动作相同，因此省略其说明。另外，关于卡片装卸装置150将重写卡RC安装于卡片支架500的步骤，由于与参照图10说明的将重写卡RC载置于卡片载置部210的动作相同，因此省略其说明。In addition, regarding the action of the card loading and unloading device 150 removing the rewrite card RC from the card loading section 210, since this action is the same as the action of removing the rewrite card RC from the card holder 500 described with reference to FIG. 9, the description thereof is omitted. In addition, regarding the step of the card loading and unloading device 150 installing the rewrite card RC on the card holder 500, since this action is the same as the action of placing the rewrite card RC on the card loading section 210 described with reference to FIG. 10, the description thereof is omitted.
<变形例一><Modification 1>
另外，也可以对重写卡RC附加标识符。该情况下，显示变更控制部460也可以利用该标识符管理重写卡RC的显示的变更次数，并且，预先设定被认为是重写卡RC劣化的变更次数。Alternatively, an identifier may be added to the rewrite card RC. In this case, the display change control unit 460 may manage the number of changes in the display of the rewrite card RC using the identifier, and may pre-set the number of changes that is considered to indicate deterioration of the rewrite card RC.
在重写卡RC的显示的变更次数达到预先设定的变更次数时，显示变更控制部460对被输送向显示变更装置250的重写卡RC的显示不进行变更而废弃。然后，对预先存储在显示变更装置250中的备用重写卡RC的显示进行变更。When the display change count of rewrite card RC reaches a preset number of changes, display change control unit 460 discards the display of rewrite card RC sent to display change device 250 without changing it. Then, the display of spare rewrite card RC stored in display change device 250 is changed.
另外，备用重写卡RC也可以预先被保持在卡片支架500中。该情况下，当重写卡RC的显示的变更次数达到预先设定的变更次数时，卡片装卸装置150从卡片支架500中拔除旧的重写卡RC并将其废弃。然后，卡片装卸装置150进一步从卡片支架500中拔除重写卡RC并载置于卡片载置部210。Alternatively, the spare rewrite card RC may be held in advance in the card holder 500. In this case, when the number of changes in the display of the rewrite card RC reaches a preset number of changes, the card loading and unloading device 150 removes the old rewrite card RC from the card holder 500 and discards it. Then, the card loading and unloading device 150 further removes the rewrite card RC from the card holder 500 and places it on the card loading unit 210.
另外，在该情况下，原则上是：在从卡片支架500中拔除了重写卡RC的状态下，也在卡片支架500中保持有备用的重写卡RC。因此，卡片有无判断部440不执行卡片支架500中是否保持有上述其他重写卡RC的检测动作。In this case, in principle, even when the rewrite card RC is removed from the card holder 500 , a spare rewrite card RC is also held in the card holder 500 . Therefore, the card presence determination unit 440 does not perform the operation of detecting whether the card holder 500 holds the other rewrite card RC.
<变形例二><Modification 2>
另外，卡片装卸装置150不一定必须具备真空泵。卡片装卸装置150也可以设有吸盘作为卡片吸附部151，并利用电磁阀172控制空气向卡片吸附部151的流入。在吸附重写卡RC时，通过在使电磁阀172断开(OFF)的状态下将卡片吸附部151推抵于重写卡RC上，从而重写卡RC被卡片吸附部151吸附。在释放重写卡RC时，通过使电磁阀172接通(ON)，空气流入卡片吸附部151，重写卡RC被从卡片吸附部151释放。但是，在卡片吸附部151为吸盘的情况下，有可能无法可靠地吸附重写卡RC。从可靠地吸附重写卡RC这一观点出发，如上所述，优选利用真空泵吸引卡片吸附部151内的空气。该情况下，由于能够利用吸附确认传感器175确认吸附，因此能够可靠地吸附重写卡RC。In addition, the card loading and unloading device 150 does not necessarily have to be provided with a vacuum pump. The card loading and unloading device 150 may also be provided with a suction cup as the card adsorption portion 151, and the inflow of air into the card adsorption portion 151 may be controlled by the electromagnetic valve 172. When adsorbing the rewrite card RC, the card adsorption portion 151 is pushed against the rewrite card RC in the state where the electromagnetic valve 172 is disconnected (OFF), so that the rewrite card RC is adsorbed by the card adsorption portion 151. When releasing the rewrite card RC, the electromagnetic valve 172 is turned on (ON), and air flows into the card adsorption portion 151, and the rewrite card RC is released from the card adsorption portion 151. However, in the case where the card adsorption portion 151 is a suction cup, the rewrite card RC may not be reliably adsorbed. From the viewpoint of reliably adsorbing the rewrite card RC, it is preferable to use a vacuum pump to suck the air in the card adsorption portion 151 as described above. In this case, since the adsorption can be confirmed by the adsorption confirmation sensor 175, the rewrite card RC can be reliably adsorbed.
<变形例三><Variation 3>
图20是表示卡片信息变更单元100的另一构成的概略图。在图20所示的构成中，卡片装卸装置150在下述两地点之间移动：即，进行重写卡RC相对于卡片支架500的装卸动作的位置与配置于该位置附近的卡片输送装置200(载置台)这两地点之间。卡片输送装置200(卡片载置部210)未位于卡片装卸装置150的垂直方向上。卡片装卸装置150例如将重写卡RC从卡片支架500拔除之后，使其平行移动并输送向卡片输送装置200。FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing another configuration of the card information changing unit 100. In the configuration shown in FIG. 20, the card loading and unloading device 150 moves between the position where the rewrite card RC is loaded and unloaded relative to the card holder 500 and the card transport device 200 (loading table) arranged near the position. The card transport device 200 (card loading section 210) is not located in the vertical direction of the card loading and unloading device 150. For example, after the card loading and unloading device 150 removes the rewrite card RC from the card holder 500, it moves parallel to the card transport device 200 and transports it.
卡片装卸装置150连接于使卡片装卸装置150在上述两地点之间移动的移动机构(未图示)。另外，由于不是通过θ轴电动机174使卡片吸附部151等旋转的构成，因此卡片装卸装置150不具备θ轴电动机174。The card handling device 150 is connected to a moving mechanism (not shown) that moves the card handling device 150 between the two locations. In addition, since the card adsorption unit 151 and the like are not rotated by the θ-axis motor 174 , the card handling device 150 does not include the θ-axis motor 174 .
如此，本实施方式涉及的卡片信息变更单元100也可以是图20所示的构成。但是，考虑到卡片信息变更单元100的小型化和安装自由度的话，优选：如上所述，卡片载置部210位于卡片装卸装置150的垂直方向上，且通过θ轴电动机174使卡片吸附部151等旋转。Thus, the card information changing unit 100 involved in this embodiment may also be configured as shown in Fig. 20. However, considering the miniaturization and installation freedom of the card information changing unit 100, it is preferred that: as described above, the card loading unit 210 is located in the vertical direction of the card loading and unloading device 150, and the card adsorption unit 151 and the like are rotated by the θ-axis motor 174.
<变形例四><Variation 4>
对下述情况进行了说明，即，卡片装卸装置150通过包括引导部152、153等的弯曲机构，使被卡片吸附部151吸附的重写卡RC弯曲，并利用Z轴电动机173，使弯曲状态的重写卡RC沿上述垂直方向移动。换言之，对卡片装卸装置150利用包括卡片吸附部151、弯曲机构及Z轴电动机173的共通机构来实现执行重写卡RC的安装动作的卡片安装机构和执行重写卡RC的拔除动作的卡片拔除机构这一情况进行了说明。但是，卡片装卸装置150也可以设有作为互不相同的机构的卡片安装机构和卡片拔除机构。The following case is described, that is, the card loading and unloading device 150 bends the rewrite card RC adsorbed by the card adsorption portion 151 by means of the bending mechanism including the guide portions 152 and 153, and moves the rewrite card RC in the bent state in the vertical direction by means of the Z-axis motor 173. In other words, the case is described in which the card loading and unloading device 150 implements the card installation mechanism for performing the installation operation of the rewrite card RC and the card removal mechanism for performing the removal operation of the rewrite card RC by means of the common mechanism including the card adsorption portion 151, the bending mechanism, and the Z-axis motor 173. However, the card loading and unloading device 150 may also be provided with the card installation mechanism and the card removal mechanism as different mechanisms.
例如，作为卡片安装机构，也可以由上述卡片吸附部151、弯曲机构及Z轴电动机173等实现，另一方面，作为卡片拔除机构，也可以由与上述卡片吸附部151、弯曲机构及Z轴电动机173等不同的机构实现。该情况下，卡片拔除机构也可以例如具有钩挂在重写卡RC的外缘部的一部分上的爪部，并且通过使爪部在上述垂直方向上移动，从而使重写卡RC钩在爪部上并将重写卡RC拔除。For example, the card attachment mechanism may be realized by the card adsorption unit 151, the bending mechanism, the Z-axis motor 173, etc., and the card removal mechanism may be realized by a mechanism different from the card adsorption unit 151, the bending mechanism, the Z-axis motor 173, etc. In this case, the card removal mechanism may include, for example, a claw hooked on a part of the outer edge of the rewrite card RC, and the claw is moved in the vertical direction so that the rewrite card RC is hooked on the claw and the rewrite card RC is removed.
也就是说，在该情况下，Z轴电动机173作为仅实现以下功能的装置发挥作用：即，通过使重写卡RC沿上述第一方向移动，将重写卡RC安装在卡片支架500或卡片载置部210上的上述的卡片插入功能。That is, in this case, the Z-axis motor 173 functions as a device that only realizes the card insertion function of mounting the rewrite card RC on the card holder 500 or the card loading portion 210 by moving the rewrite card RC in the first direction.
<变形例五><Variation 5>
另外，卡片装卸装置150也可以被实现为至少对卡片支架500仅作为上述卡片安装机构发挥作用的卡片安装装置(参照图2)。也就是说，卡片安装装置至少对卡片支架500不设有上述卡片拔除机构。In addition, the card loading and unloading device 150 may be realized as a card loading device that functions only as the card loading mechanism for at least the card holder 500 (see FIG. 2 ). That is, the card loading device does not have the card removal mechanism for at least the card holder 500 .
具体而言，卡片安装装置不执行图9所示的从卡片支架500拔除重写卡RC的拔除动作、以及图10所示的向卡片载置部210安装重写卡RC的安装动作。卡片安装装置执行从卡片载置部210拔除重写卡RC的拔除动作(与图9所示的拔除动作相同的步骤)、以及向卡片支架500安装重写卡RC的安装动作(与图10所示的安装动作相同的步骤)。也就是说，卡片安装装置只要具有将被从显示变更装置250输送来的且显示信息已变更后的重写卡RC安装在卡片支架500上的功能即可。Specifically, the card installation device does not perform the removal action of removing the rewrite card RC from the card holder 500 shown in FIG. 9 and the installation action of installing the rewrite card RC into the card loading section 210 shown in FIG. 10. The card installation device performs the removal action of removing the rewrite card RC from the card loading section 210 (the same steps as the removal action shown in FIG. 9) and the installation action of installing the rewrite card RC into the card holder 500 (the same steps as the installation action shown in FIG. 10). In other words, the card installation device only needs to have the function of installing the rewrite card RC sent from the display change device 250 and after the display information has been changed into the card holder 500.
该情况下，例如，卡片输送装置200只要作为将被从显示变更装置250输送来的且显示信息已变更后的重写卡RC输送至卡片安装装置的装置发挥作用即可。另外，显示变更装置250也可以设有临时收纳变更显示信息的重写卡RC的卡片收纳部(配置重写卡RC的配置部)(未图示)。In this case, for example, the card transport device 200 may function as a device that transports the rewrite card RC whose display information has been changed and which is transported from the display change device 250 to the card installation device. In addition, the display change device 250 may be provided with a card storage section (a storage section for storing the rewrite card RC) (not shown) for temporarily storing the rewrite card RC whose display information has been changed.
例如，用户从被发出至托盘保管架60的多个(例如：100个)托盘600中取出重写卡RC，并将取出的重写卡RC收纳在卡片收纳部中。当显示变更控制部460接收到开始显示信息的变更处理的用户操作时，控制显示变更装置250，根据处方数据将被收纳于卡片收纳部中的重写卡RC的显示信息依次变更。显示变更装置250将变更了显示信息的重写卡RC交接至卡片输送装置200。For example, the user takes out the rewrite card RC from the plurality of (e.g., 100) trays 600 sent to the tray storage rack 60, and stores the taken out rewrite card RC in the card storage unit. When the display change control unit 460 receives the user operation to start the display information change process, it controls the display change device 250 to sequentially change the display information of the rewrite card RC stored in the card storage unit according to the prescription data. The display change device 250 delivers the rewrite card RC with the changed display information to the card transport device 200.
卡片输送控制部450控制卡片输送装置200，将变更了显示信息的重写卡RC从显示变更装置250输送向卡片载置部210。移动控制部420和电磁阀控制部430控制卡片安装装置，将被载置于卡片载置部210且显示信息已变更后的重写卡RC安装于卡片支架500。The card transport control unit 450 controls the card transport device 200 to transport the rewrite card RC with changed display information from the display change device 250 to the card loading unit 210. The movement control unit 420 and the solenoid valve control unit 430 control the card installation device to install the rewrite card RC with changed display information placed on the card loading unit 210 into the card holder 500.
即使是该卡片安装装置，也能够通过至少卡片吸附部151、弯曲机构及Z轴电动机173，将吸附的并弯曲的重写卡RC从卡片支架500的正面侧安装到卡片支架500上。Even this card mounting device can mount the adsorbed and bent rewrite card RC to the card holder 500 from the front side of the card holder 500 by at least the card adsorption portion 151 , the bending mechanism, and the Z-axis motor 173 .
另外，用户也可以在将显示信息已变更后的重写卡RC从显示变更装置250拔除之后安装于卡片安装装置上。该情况下，卡片信息变更单元100也可以不具备卡片输送装置200。例如，在卡片安装装置中，利用卡片吸附部151吸附已安装的重写卡RC，同时利用弯曲机构使重写卡RC呈弯曲状态。在该状态下，Z轴电动机173使支撑部161从卡片支架500的正面侧向卡片支架500移动，由此，卡片安装装置将重写卡RC安装于卡片支架500上。即，在该情况下，可以说卡片安装装置对于卡片载置部210也不设有上述卡片拔除机构。In addition, the user may remove the rewrite card RC after the display information has been changed from the display change device 250 and then install it on the card installation device. In this case, the card information change unit 100 may not include the card conveying device 200. For example, in the card installation device, the installed rewrite card RC is adsorbed by the card adsorption portion 151, and the rewrite card RC is bent by the bending mechanism. In this state, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the support portion 161 from the front side of the card holder 500 to the card holder 500, thereby the card installation device installs the rewrite card RC on the card holder 500. That is, in this case, it can be said that the card installation device is not provided with the above-mentioned card removal mechanism for the card loading portion 210.
另外，卡片安装装置也可以是对卡片载置部210安装重写卡RC的装置。在该情况下，例如，由用户将重写卡RC从卡片支架500中拔除并将其安装到卡片安装装置。然后，卡片安装装置将重写卡RC以被吸附且弯曲的状态安装于卡片载置部210。重写卡RC被卡片输送装置200输送到显示变更装置250之后，其显示信息通过显示变更装置250被变更。然后，重写卡RC被卡片输送装置200输送到卡片载置部210，卡片安装装置从卡片载置部210拔除重写卡RC后将其安装到卡片支架500。另外，用户也可以从显示变更装置250(或卡片载置部210)拔除重写卡RC并将其安装到卡片安装装置。In addition, the card installation device may also be a device for installing the rewrite card RC on the card loading section 210. In this case, for example, the user removes the rewrite card RC from the card holder 500 and installs it in the card installation device. Then, the card installation device installs the rewrite card RC in the card loading section 210 in a sucked and bent state. After the rewrite card RC is transported to the display change device 250 by the card conveying device 200, its display information is changed by the display change device 250. Then, the rewrite card RC is transported to the card loading section 210 by the card conveying device 200, and the card installation device removes the rewrite card RC from the card loading section 210 and installs it in the card holder 500. In addition, the user may remove the rewrite card RC from the display change device 250 (or the card loading section 210) and install it in the card installation device.
<升降装置><Lifting device>
接下来，对升降装置300的构成例进行说明。图11是表示升降装置300的构成例的图。Next, a configuration example of the lifting device 300 will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the lifting device 300. FIG.
如图11中的11001所示，升降装置300设置在框体51的内部，其中，框体51限定了供托盘保管架60插入的插入口53。升降装置300将重写卡RC的显示信息被卡片信息变更单元100重写了的托盘600，从托盘输送机构80输送向被配置于插入口53中的托盘保管架60。As shown at 11001 in FIG. 11 , the lifting device 300 is disposed inside the frame 51, wherein the frame 51 defines an insertion port 53 for inserting the tray storage rack 60. The lifting device 300 transports the tray 600, whose display information of the rewrite card RC is rewritten by the card information changing unit 100, from the tray transport mechanism 80 to the tray storage rack 60 disposed in the insertion port 53.
如图11中的11002所示，升降装置300具备托盘输送部301。托盘输送部301将被从发药装置30输送且重写卡RC的显示信息被重写的托盘输送机构80上的托盘600输送向托盘保管架60。托盘输送部301主要包括支柱303、梁部305、以及托盘支撑部307。As shown in 11002 of FIG11 , the lifting device 300 includes a tray conveying unit 301. The tray conveying unit 301 conveys the tray 600 on the tray conveying mechanism 80 conveyed from the medicine dispensing device 30 and on which the display information of the rewrite card RC is rewritten, to the tray storage rack 60. The tray conveying unit 301 mainly includes a support column 303, a beam portion 305, and a tray supporting portion 307.
支柱303将在x轴方向上延伸的梁部305以在z轴方向上能够滑动的方式加以支撑。梁部305将能够支撑托盘600的托盘支撑部307以在梁部305的延伸方向(x轴方向)上能够滑动的方式加以支撑。通过该构成，能够在xz平面(垂直平面)内使托盘支撑部307移动。其结果是，托盘输送部301能够将托盘输送机构80上的托盘600向托盘保管架60的各保管位置输送。The support column 303 supports the beam portion 305 extending in the x-axis direction so as to be slidable in the z-axis direction. The beam portion 305 supports the tray support portion 307 capable of supporting the tray 600 so as to be slidable in the extending direction (x-axis direction) of the beam portion 305. With this configuration, the tray support portion 307 can be moved in the xz plane (vertical plane). As a result, the tray conveying unit 301 can convey the tray 600 on the tray conveying mechanism 80 to each storage position of the tray storage rack 60.
托盘支撑部307包括驱动部307a、第一支撑部307b、第一移动部307c、第二支撑部307d、以及第二移动部307e。The tray supporting portion 307 includes a driving portion 307 a , a first supporting portion 307 b , a first moving portion 307 c , a second supporting portion 307 d , and a second moving portion 307 e .
驱动部307a通过使第一移动部307c动作而使第一支撑部307b在y轴方向上移动。第一移动部307c支撑第一支撑部307b并使第一支撑部307b在y轴方向上滑动。第一支撑部307b是支撑托盘600的短边侧的爪部。第一支撑部307b通过被卡挂部601(参照图2)暂时卡挂住而支撑托盘600的短边侧。卡挂部601是设置在托盘600边缘部的短边侧上的、用于暂时卡挂住被从该边缘部的下侧插入的第一支撑部307b的檐部。由此，能够在第一支撑部307b支撑托盘600短边侧的情况下，将托盘600输送(推出)至托盘保管架60。The driving part 307a moves the first supporting part 307b in the y-axis direction by operating the first moving part 307c. The first moving part 307c supports the first supporting part 307b and slides the first supporting part 307b in the y-axis direction. The first supporting part 307b is a claw part that supports the short side of the tray 600. The first supporting part 307b supports the short side of the tray 600 by being temporarily caught by the hooking part 601 (refer to FIG. 2). The hooking part 601 is a flange part provided on the short side of the edge of the tray 600 for temporarily catching the first supporting part 307b inserted from the lower side of the edge. Thus, the tray 600 can be transported (pushed out) to the tray storage rack 60 while the first supporting part 307b supports the short side of the tray 600.
另外，驱动部307a通过使第二移动部307e动作而使第二支撑部307d在x轴方向或z轴方向上移动。第二移动部307e包括动作部307ea和引导部307eb。动作部307ea与第二支撑部307d连接，并且其一部分(前端部)嵌合在用于引导动作部307ea的引导部307eb的内部。因此，第二支撑部307d沿着引导部307eb移动。如图11中的11002所示，引导部307eb在z轴方向上延伸，但在其下方朝向外侧弯曲。In addition, the driving part 307a moves the second supporting part 307d in the x-axis direction or the z-axis direction by moving the second moving part 307e. The second moving part 307e includes an operating part 307ea and a guide part 307eb. The operating part 307ea is connected to the second supporting part 307d, and a part (front end) thereof is embedded in the inside of the guide part 307eb for guiding the operating part 307ea. Therefore, the second supporting part 307d moves along the guide part 307eb. As shown in 11002 in Figure 11, the guide part 307eb extends in the z-axis direction, but is bent toward the outside below it.
第二支撑部307d是支撑托盘600长边侧的棒状部件。第二支撑部307d通过支撑突出部602(参照图2)，从而支撑托盘600的长边侧。突出部602是设置在托盘600缘部的长边侧且被第二支撑部307d支撑的檐部。由此，第二支撑部307d能够支撑托盘600的长边侧。另外，在被输送到托盘保管架60的各保管位置时，突出部602被设置在该保管位置的导轨所支撑。The second support part 307d is a rod-shaped member that supports the long side of the tray 600. The second support part 307d supports the long side of the tray 600 by supporting the protrusion 602 (see FIG. 2). The protrusion 602 is an eaves portion that is provided on the long side of the edge of the tray 600 and supported by the second support part 307d. Thus, the second support part 307d can support the long side of the tray 600. In addition, when the tray is transported to each storage position of the tray storage rack 60, the protrusion 602 is supported by the guide rail provided at the storage position.
图12是表示第二支撑部307d的动作例的图。如图12中的12001～12004所示，第二支撑部307d在四个位置处呈待机状态。Fig. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the second supporting portion 307d. As shown in 12001 to 12004 in Fig. 12, the second supporting portion 307d is in a standby state at four positions.
图12中的12001表示第二支撑部307d的初始位置。如图12中的12001所示，第二支撑部307d在最为远离驱动部307a的位置(最下部)Po1处呈最向X轴方向打开的状态。在位置Po1处，第二支撑部307d等待卡片信息变更单元100对重写卡RC的显示信息进行重写。12001 in FIG12 indicates the initial position of the second support portion 307d. As shown in 12001 in FIG12, the second support portion 307d is in a state of being most opened in the X-axis direction at the position Po1 (lowest part) farthest from the driving portion 307a. At the position Po1, the second support portion 307d waits for the card information changing unit 100 to rewrite the display information of the rewrite card RC.
图12中的12002表示第二支撑部307d在最接近驱动部307a的位置(最上部)Po2处呈最向x轴方向闭合的状态。第二支撑部307d通过从图12中的12001的状态变为12002的状态，从而能够在托盘输送机构80中，从下侧支撑托盘600的突出部602并输送至托盘保管架60的任意的保管位置。即，图12中的12002的状态是第二支撑部307d支撑着托盘600的状态。12002 in FIG. 12 indicates a state in which the second support portion 307d is most closed in the x-axis direction at the position (uppermost portion) Po2 closest to the drive portion 307a. The second support portion 307d changes from the state 12001 in FIG. 12 to the state 12002, thereby being able to support the protruding portion 602 of the pallet 600 from the lower side in the pallet conveying mechanism 80 and convey it to any storage position of the pallet storage rack 60. That is, the state 12002 in FIG. 12 is a state in which the second support portion 307d supports the pallet 600.
图12中的12003表示第二支撑部307d从图12中的12002的状态下降了规定距离后的状态。第二支撑部307d在位置Po1与Po2之间的位置Po3处停止。在该状态下，第二支撑部307d不支撑托盘600的突出部602，托盘600被第一支撑部307b和托盘保管架60的任意保管位置的导轨61(参照图13)这两点所支撑。关于位置Po3，只要是下述位置即可：即，在能够解除托盘600的支撑并且将托盘600向托盘保管架60的任意保管位置插入时，第二支撑部307d不与托盘600发生干扰的位置。12003 in FIG. 12 indicates a state where the second support portion 307d has been lowered by a predetermined distance from the state 12002 in FIG. 12. The second support portion 307d stops at a position Po3 between the positions Po1 and Po2. In this state, the second support portion 307d does not support the protrusion 602 of the pallet 600, and the pallet 600 is supported by two points, namely, the first support portion 307b and the guide rail 61 (see FIG. 13) at any storage position of the pallet storage rack 60. The position Po3 may be any position where the second support portion 307d does not interfere with the pallet 600 when the support of the pallet 600 can be released and the pallet 600 is inserted into any storage position of the pallet storage rack 60.
图12中的12004表示第二支撑部307d从图12中的12003的状态进一步下降了的状态。在该状态下，被插入到引导部307eb中的动作部307ea的一部分位于引导部307eb的弯曲部分，第二支撑部307d在靠近位置Po1的位置(高度)处、即位置Po4处停止。因此，即使在将托盘600向托盘保管架60的任意保管位置插入的过程中托盘600意外掉落，第二支撑部307d也能够接住掉落的托盘600。在将托盘600插入到该保管位置之后，第二支撑部307d向图12中的12001所示的初始位置返回。12004 in FIG. 12 indicates a state where the second support portion 307d is further lowered from the state 12003 in FIG. 12. In this state, a portion of the operating portion 307ea inserted into the guide portion 307eb is located at the curved portion of the guide portion 307eb, and the second support portion 307d stops at a position (height) close to the position Po1, that is, at the position Po4. Therefore, even if the tray 600 accidentally falls during the insertion of the tray 600 into any storage position of the tray storage rack 60, the second support portion 307d can catch the fallen tray 600. After the tray 600 is inserted into the storage position, the second support portion 307d returns to the initial position shown in 12001 in FIG. 12.
另外，图12的12001中，在利用卡片信息变更单元100对重写卡RC的显示信息进行重写期间，第二支撑部307d在位置Po1处以打开状态待机，但并不限定于此。In addition, in 12001 of FIG. 12 , while the display information of the rewrite card RC is being rewritten by the card information changing unit 100 , the second supporting portion 307 d stands by in the open state at the position Po1 , but the present invention is not limited thereto.
例如，升降控制部410也可以在上述重写期间，使第二支撑部307d从位置Po1的打开状态移动至位置Po4的关闭状态。例如，升降控制部410也可以以向卡片信息变更单元100交接了重写卡RC这一情况作为触发点(trigger)，使第二支撑部307d从打开状态移动至关闭状态。也就是说，第二支撑部307d从最为打开的状态向关闭至能够支撑托盘600的突出部602的位置为止的关闭状态移动。For example, the lifting control unit 410 may also move the second support portion 307d from the open state at position Po1 to the closed state at position Po4 during the rewriting period. For example, the lifting control unit 410 may also use the fact that the rewriting card RC is handed over to the card information change unit 100 as a trigger to move the second support portion 307d from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the second support portion 307d moves from the most open state to the closed state where it is closed to the position where the protrusion 602 of the tray 600 can be supported.
该情况下，当重写卡RC的显示信息的重写完成且重写卡RC从卡片信息变更单元100返回到托盘600时，第二支撑部307d呈支撑托盘600的突出部602的状态。因此，在重写卡RC返回到托盘600时，能够缩短从位置Po 1的打开状态移动至位置Po4的关闭状态为止所需的时间。In this case, when the rewriting of the display information of the rewrite card RC is completed and the rewrite card RC is returned from the card information changing unit 100 to the tray 600, the second supporting portion 307d is in a state of supporting the protruding portion 602 of the tray 600. Therefore, when the rewrite card RC is returned to the tray 600, the time required to move from the open state at the position Po1 to the closed state at the position Po4 can be shortened.
<托盘输送部的动作例><Operation Example of Pallet Conveyor Unit>
接下来，对托盘输送部301的动作例进行说明。图13是表示将托盘600输送到托盘保管架60时的第一支撑部307b和第二支撑部307d的动作例的图。Next, an operation example of the tray conveyor 301 will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an operation example of the first support portion 307 b and the second support portion 307 d when the tray 600 is conveyed to the tray storage rack 60 .
以往，托盘输送部301通过利用第一支撑部307b和第二支撑部307d支撑托盘600，并且在使其倾斜的状态下，将托盘600以规定轨道向托盘保管架60侧推出，从而将托盘600插入到托盘保管架60的各保管位置。该情况下，在托盘保管架60相对于托盘发出装置50倾斜时，托盘输送部301无法一边吸收该倾斜一边推出托盘600，从而存在输送途中托盘600卡在托盘保管架60中这一情况。本实施方式的托盘输送部301通过按照如下方式将托盘600插入托盘保管架60，能够抑制发生如上述那样的托盘600被卡住的情况。Conventionally, the pallet conveyor 301 supports the pallet 600 by using the first supporting portion 307b and the second supporting portion 307d, and pushes the pallet 600 toward the pallet storage rack 60 along a predetermined track while the pallet 600 is tilted, thereby inserting the pallet 600 into each storage position of the pallet storage rack 60. In this case, when the pallet storage rack 60 is tilted relative to the pallet delivery device 50, the pallet conveyor 301 cannot push out the pallet 600 while absorbing the tilt, and the pallet 600 may get stuck in the pallet storage rack 60 during transportation. The pallet conveyor 301 of this embodiment can prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned stuck pallet 600 by inserting the pallet 600 into the pallet storage rack 60 as follows.
如图13中的13001所示，升降控制部410通过控制托盘输送部301，使托盘600从托盘输送机构80(参照图11)向托盘保管架60的规定保管位置的正面移动。此时，托盘600被移动到导轨61上方的离导轨61规定距离(例如：5mm左右)的高度上。这是为了将托盘600向保管位置插入时不会与导轨61发生碰撞。另外，第一支撑部307b处于卡挂在托盘600的与托盘保管架60相反一侧的短边侧的卡挂部601上的状态。如图12中的12002所示，第二支撑部307d处于在位置Po2处支撑着托盘600的突出部602的状态。在图13的13001的状态下，托盘600呈大致水平状态。As shown at 13001 in FIG. 13 , the lifting control unit 410 controls the tray conveying unit 301 to move the tray 600 from the tray conveying mechanism 80 (see FIG. 11 ) to the front of the specified storage position of the tray storage rack 60. At this time, the tray 600 is moved to a height above the guide rail 61 at a specified distance (e.g., about 5 mm) from the guide rail 61. This is to prevent the tray 600 from colliding with the guide rail 61 when it is inserted into the storage position. In addition, the first support portion 307b is in a state of being hooked on the hook portion 601 on the short side of the tray 600 opposite to the tray storage rack 60. As shown at 12002 in FIG. 12 , the second support portion 307d is in a state of supporting the protrusion 602 of the tray 600 at the position Po2. In the state of 13001 in FIG. 13 , the tray 600 is in a substantially horizontal state.
接下来，升降控制部410从图13中的13001的状态将托盘600呈大致水平地输送向保管位置。然后，如图13中的13002所示，升降控制部410使托盘输送部301在下述位置处停止，即，在托盘600的与托盘保管架60相对的短边侧(端部600e1)被插入于保管位置的位置处。Next, the lifting control unit 410 conveys the tray 600 to the storage position in a substantially horizontal manner from the state 13001 in Fig. 13. Then, as shown in 13002 in Fig. 13, the lifting control unit 410 stops the tray conveying unit 301 at a position where the short side (end 600e1) of the tray 600 facing the tray storage rack 60 is inserted into the storage position.
接下来，如图13中的13003所示，升降控制部410通过使第一支撑部307b上升，将托盘600的端部600e1载置在导轨61的端部61a上。另外，升降控制部410通过如图12中的12003所示，使第二支撑部307d从位置Po2向位置Po3移动，从而解除第二支撑部307d对托盘600的突出部602的支撑。因此，在图13的13003的状态中，托盘600呈被第一支撑部307b和导轨61这两点支撑的状态。Next, as shown in 13003 in FIG. 13 , the lifting control unit 410 raises the first support unit 307b to place the end 600e1 of the tray 600 on the end 61a of the guide rail 61. In addition, as shown in 12003 in FIG. 12 , the lifting control unit 410 moves the second support unit 307d from the position Po2 to the position Po3, thereby releasing the second support unit 307d from supporting the protruding portion 602 of the tray 600. Therefore, in the state 13003 in FIG. 13 , the tray 600 is supported by two points, the first support unit 307b and the guide rail 61.
接下来，升降控制部410通过在使托盘600倾斜的状态下使第一支撑部307b移动，从而进一步插入托盘600。在各保管位置处，在导轨61的端部61a的附近处设置有防止托盘600从保管位置掉落的防落爪62。如图13中的13004所示，在托盘600从导轨61的端部61a移动至超过了防落爪62的位置时，升降控制部410使第一支撑部307b停止。Next, the lifting control unit 410 moves the first support unit 307b while the tray 600 is tilted, thereby further inserting the tray 600. At each storage position, a fall prevention claw 62 is provided near the end 61a of the guide rail 61 to prevent the tray 600 from falling from the storage position. As shown in 13004 in FIG. 13, when the tray 600 moves from the end 61a of the guide rail 61 to a position beyond the fall prevention claw 62, the lifting control unit 410 stops the first support unit 307b.
接下来，如图13中的13005所示，升降控制部410通过在保持支撑着托盘600的状态不变的情况下，使第一支撑部307b下降，从而使托盘600返回大致水平的状态。此时，如图12中的12004所示，升降控制部410使第二支撑部307d从位置Po3下降至位置Po4。然后，升降控制部410将托盘600推入保管位置。Next, as shown in 13005 in FIG. 13 , the lifting control unit 410 lowers the first support unit 307b while maintaining the state of supporting the tray 600, thereby returning the tray 600 to a substantially horizontal state. At this time, as shown in 12004 in FIG. 12 , the lifting control unit 410 lowers the second support unit 307d from the position Po3 to the position Po4. Then, the lifting control unit 410 pushes the tray 600 into the storage position.
然后，升降控制部410使第一支撑部307b向下方移动并从托盘600的卡挂部601脱离，由此托盘600被收纳在保管位置。Then, the lifting control unit 410 moves the first support portion 307 b downward to disengage the first support portion 307 b from the hook portion 601 of the tray 600 , whereby the tray 600 is stored in the storage position.
如此，在将托盘600输送至托盘保管架60时，如图13中的13003所示，在托盘600的端部600e 1被插入于保管位置时，托盘输送部301将与该端部600e1相反侧的端部600e2抬起。由此，托盘600呈被导轨61的端部61a和第一支撑部307b这两点支撑的状态。之后，如图13中的13005所示，托盘输送部301将托盘600插入托盘保管架60。Thus, when the pallet 600 is conveyed to the pallet storage rack 60, as shown in 13003 in FIG. 13, when the end 600e1 of the pallet 600 is inserted into the storage position, the pallet conveying unit 301 lifts the end 600e2 on the opposite side of the end 600e1. As a result, the pallet 600 is supported by the end 61a of the guide rail 61 and the first support portion 307b. Thereafter, as shown in 13005 in FIG. 13, the pallet conveying unit 301 inserts the pallet 600 into the pallet storage rack 60.
该情况下，由于是以两点支撑状态下插入托盘600，因此，相比以第一支撑部307b和两个第二支撑部307d这三点支撑的状态(即，沿着规定的轨迹)插入托盘600的情况，托盘600的移动自由度提高。因此，即使是托盘保管架60相对于托盘发出装置50倾斜的状态，也能够吸收该倾斜并将托盘600插入到托盘保管架60中。In this case, since the pallet 600 is inserted in a two-point supported state, the pallet 600 has a higher degree of freedom of movement than when the pallet 600 is inserted in a three-point supported state (i.e., along a predetermined trajectory) by the first support portion 307b and the two second support portions 307d. Therefore, even if the pallet storage rack 60 is tilted relative to the pallet delivery device 50, the pallet 600 can be inserted into the pallet storage rack 60 while absorbing the tilt.
<升降装置的控制例><Control Example of Lifting Device>
接下来，对升降装置300的控制例进行说明。通常，升降装置300将托盘600发出到对托盘600被搬运的每一场所(例如：病房)准备的多个托盘保管架60中。或者，升降装置300以下述方式发出托盘600，即，在一个托盘保管架60中按每一该场所分开的状态进行保管。表示托盘600(即，被收纳在托盘600中的药剂)被搬运的场所的信息，与表示该药剂的药剂数据相关联地被管理。Next, a control example of the lifting device 300 is described. Generally, the lifting device 300 sends out the tray 600 to a plurality of tray storage racks 60 prepared for each place (for example, a ward) where the tray 600 is transported. Alternatively, the lifting device 300 sends out the tray 600 so that the tray 600 is stored in a separate state for each place in one tray storage rack 60. Information indicating the place where the tray 600 (that is, the medicine stored in the tray 600) is transported is managed in association with medicine data indicating the medicine.
在现有的升降装置中，考虑将向不同场所搬运的托盘600发出至托盘保管架60的情况。在现有的升降装置中，在被搬运到任意场所的托盘600的向托盘保管架60的发出完成之后，将用于受理向不同于该任意场所的场所搬运的托盘600的发出开始指示(允许发出)的图像显示在触摸面板70上。例如，上述任意场所是A病房，不同于上述任意场所的场所是B病房。另外，例如，发出开始指示包括更换为保管向上述不同场所搬运的托盘600的托盘保管架60的更换指示。现有的升降装置是在受理了表示发出开始指示的用户输入之后，开始向托盘保管架60发出向上述不同场所搬运的托盘600。In the conventional lifting device, a case where a pallet 600 to be transported to a different place is sent out to the pallet storage rack 60 is considered. In the conventional lifting device, after the sending out of the pallet 600 transported to an arbitrary place to the pallet storage rack 60 is completed, an image for accepting a start instruction for sending out (permitting sending out) the pallet 600 to be transported to a place different from the arbitrary place is displayed on the touch panel 70. For example, the arbitrary place is ward A, and the place different from the arbitrary place is ward B. In addition, for example, the sending out start instruction includes a replacement instruction for replacing the pallet storage rack 60 for storing the pallet 60 transported to the different place. The conventional lifting device starts sending out the pallet 600 to the different place to the pallet storage rack 60 after accepting the user input indicating the start of sending out instruction.
然而，该情况下，为了识别托盘600向上述任意场所的发出完成情况，用户需要随时监视被搬运至该任意场所的托盘600的发出状况。另外，当到被搬运至该任意场所的托盘600的发出完成为止还剩数个托盘时，用户需要等待该数个托盘的发出。However, in this case, in order to recognize the completion of the delivery of the tray 600 to the above-mentioned arbitrary place, the user needs to monitor the delivery status of the tray 600 transported to the arbitrary place at any time. In addition, when there are still several trays left until the delivery of the tray 600 transported to the arbitrary place is completed, the user needs to wait for the delivery of the several trays.
另一方面，在本控制例中，托盘输送部301执行以下的处理。考虑下述情况：即，在将使用于上述任意场所的托盘600(第一托盘组)发出至托盘保管架60时，接收了表示允许向托盘保管架60发出在上述不同场所中使用的托盘600(第二托盘组)的用户输入。该情况下，托盘输送部301是在该任意场所中所使用的托盘600的向托盘保管架60的发出完成了之后，接着开始发出上述不同场所中使用的托盘600。On the other hand, in this control example, the pallet conveying unit 301 performs the following processing. Consider the following case: when the pallet 600 (first pallet group) used in the above-mentioned arbitrary place is sent to the pallet storage rack 60, the user input indicating permission to send the pallet 600 (second pallet group) used in the above-mentioned different place to the pallet storage rack 60 is received. In this case, the pallet conveying unit 301 starts sending the pallet 600 used in the above-mentioned different place after the sending of the pallet 600 used in the arbitrary place to the pallet storage rack 60 is completed.
另外，上述第一托盘组是包括至少一个上述任意场所中所使用的托盘600的托盘组。上述第二托盘组是包括至少一个上述不同场所中所使用的托盘600的托盘组。另外，可以说：上述控制例规定了将多个托盘600划分为搬运目的地互不相同的第一托盘组和第二托盘组并向托盘保管架60发出时的处理。The first pallet group is a pallet group including at least one pallet 600 used in any of the above-mentioned places. The second pallet group is a pallet group including at least one pallet 600 used in the different places. In addition, it can be said that the control example specifies the processing when a plurality of pallets 600 are divided into the first pallet group and the second pallet group having different transport destinations and sent out to the pallet storage rack 60.
具体而言，升降控制部410对要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出剩余数进行计数。当发出剩余数变为规定数量(例如：4～5个)时，升降控制部410通知触摸面板控制部470在触摸面板70上显示用于受理上述用户输入的图像。触摸面板控制部470接收该通知并使触摸面板70显示该图像。Specifically, the lifting control unit 410 counts the number of trays 600 to be transported to ward A. When the number of trays 600 to be transported reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 4 to 5), the lifting control unit 410 notifies the touch panel control unit 470 to display an image for accepting the user input on the touch panel 70. The touch panel control unit 470 receives the notification and displays the image on the touch panel 70.
升降控制部410监控：在要被搬运到A病房的所有托盘600发出完成之前，触摸面板控制部470是否受理了上述用户输入。当升降控制部410判断为在上述发出完成之前存在上述用户输入的受理时，在要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的向托盘保管架60的发出完成之后，接着开始发出B病房中所使用的托盘600。The lifting control unit 410 monitors whether the touch panel control unit 470 has accepted the user input before all the trays 600 to be transported to ward A are sent out. When the lifting control unit 410 determines that the user input has been accepted before the sending out is completed, after the sending out of the trays 600 to be transported to ward A to the tray storage rack 60 is completed, the sending out of the trays 600 used in ward B is started next.
由此，用户可以减少如现有的升降装置那样，随时监控托盘600的发出状况或等待托盘600的发出所需的劳力和时间。因此，可提高用户的便利性。Thus, the user can reduce the labor and time required for always monitoring the delivery status of the tray 600 or waiting for the delivery of the tray 600 as in the conventional lifting device. Therefore, the convenience of the user can be improved.
另外，托盘输送部301也可以将上述不同场所中使用的托盘600输送到与被保管在托盘保管架60中的上述任意场所中使用的托盘600隔离的位置。即，在要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出处理期间，当接收到上述用户输入时，托盘输送部301将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600输送到下述保管位置：即，与已经输送了要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的托盘保管架60的保管位置相邻的保管位置不同的保管位置。该不同的保管位置例如是从最后保管要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的保管位置空开了一个保管位置后的保管位置。另外，最后保管要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的保管位置与最先保管要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的保管位置也可以不是一个保管位置，而是经由多个保管位置而隔开。另外，要被搬运到B病房的托盘600也可以保管在托盘保管架60中的、与最后保管要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的列不同的列中。In addition, the tray conveyor 301 may convey the tray 600 used in the above-mentioned different places to a position separated from the tray 600 used in the above-mentioned any place stored in the tray storage rack 60. That is, during the sending process of the tray 600 to be transported to the A ward, when the above-mentioned user input is received, the tray conveyor 301 conveys the tray 600 to be transported to the B ward to the following storage position: that is, a storage position different from the storage position adjacent to the storage position of the tray storage rack 60 to which the tray 600 to be transported to the A ward has been transported. The different storage position is, for example, a storage position after one storage position is vacated from the storage position where the tray 600 to be transported to the A ward was stored last. In addition, the storage position where the tray 600 to be transported to the A ward was stored last and the storage position where the tray 600 to be transported to the B ward was stored first may not be a single storage position, but may be separated by a plurality of storage positions. In addition, the tray 600 to be transported to the B ward may be stored in a row of the tray storage rack 60 that is different from the row in which the tray 600 to be transported to the A ward is stored last.
该情况下，当在不改变托盘保管架60的情况下，将要被搬运到多个场所的托盘600保管于一个托盘保管架60中时，能够从视觉上针对每一场所划分托盘600的保管位置。因此，用户容易把握托盘600的搬运场所。In this case, when the pallets 600 to be transported to multiple locations are stored in one pallet storage rack 60 without changing the pallet storage rack 60, the storage position of the pallets 600 can be visually divided for each location. Therefore, the user can easily understand the transport location of the pallet 600.
托盘输送部301将托盘600按照输送顺序排列并配置于托盘保管架60中。图14中的14001～14003是表示托盘600于托盘保管架60中的保管例的图。在图14的示例中，托盘输送部301将托盘600按照输送顺序，从保管区域SAr1的最上层朝向最下层进行保管，当保管至保管区域SAr1的最下层时，从保管区域SAr2的最上层朝向最下层进行保管。然后，当保管至保管区域SAr2的最下层时，托盘输送部301从保管区域SAr3的最上层朝向最下层进行保管。The tray conveyor 301 arranges the trays 600 in the conveying order and arranges them in the tray storage rack 60. 14001 to 14003 in FIG. 14 are diagrams showing an example of storage of the trays 600 in the tray storage rack 60. In the example of FIG. 14, the tray conveyor 301 stores the trays 600 from the uppermost layer to the lowermost layer of the storage area SAr1 in the conveying order, and when the trays 600 are stored at the lowermost layer of the storage area SAr1, the trays 600 are stored from the uppermost layer to the lowermost layer of the storage area SAr2. Then, when the trays 600 are stored at the lowermost layer of the storage area SAr2, the tray conveyor 301 stores the trays 600 from the uppermost layer to the lowermost layer of the storage area SAr3.
在图14的14001中，设定为要被搬运到A病房的托盘600被保管在保管区域SAr1的整个区域以及保管区域SAr2的上层部分。当在要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出处理期间接收了上述用户输入时，如图14中的14002所示，托盘输送部301空开可保管一个托盘600的保管位置(空间Sp1)，而输送要被搬运到B病房的托盘600(图中的600(B))。然后，当在要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的发出处理期间接收了上述用户输入时，如图14中的14003所示，托盘输送部301空开可保管一个托盘600的保管位置(空间Sp2)，而输送要被搬运到C病房的托盘600(图中的600(C))。In 14001 of FIG. 14 , it is set that the pallet 600 to be transported to ward A is stored in the entire area of the storage area SAr1 and the upper part of the storage area SAr2. When the above-mentioned user input is received during the sending process of the pallet 600 to be transported to ward A, as shown in 14002 of FIG. 14 , the pallet conveying unit 301 leaves the storage position (space Sp1) that can store one pallet 600 vacant, and transports the pallet 600 to be transported to ward B (600 (B) in the figure). Then, when the above-mentioned user input is received during the sending process of the pallet 600 to be transported to ward B, as shown in 14003 of FIG. 14 , the pallet conveying unit 301 leaves the storage position (space Sp2) that can store one pallet 600 vacant, and transports the pallet 600 to be transported to ward C (600 (C) in the figure).
另外，升降控制部410也能够在要被搬运到上述任意场所的托盘600的发出处理期间接收用户输入，其中，该用户输入表示允许对上述不同的多个场所的每一个场所发出托盘600。例如，在要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出处理期间，不仅能够接收要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的发出许可，而且也能够接收要被搬运到C病房的托盘600的发出许可。该情况下，由于能够减少用户的操作次数，因此可进一步提高用户的便利性。In addition, the lifting control unit 410 can also receive a user input during the process of sending out the tray 600 to any of the above-mentioned places, wherein the user input indicates permission to send out the tray 600 to each of the above-mentioned multiple different places. For example, during the process of sending out the tray 600 to the A ward, it is possible to receive not only permission to send out the tray 600 to the B ward, but also permission to send out the tray 600 to the C ward. In this case, since the number of user operations can be reduced, the convenience of the user can be further improved.
(处理例)(Processing Example)
图15是表示由升降控制部410实施的控制例的流程图。在本处理例中，设定为：在完成了要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出之后，进行要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的发出。Fig. 15 is a flowchart showing a control example performed by the lifting control unit 410. In this processing example, it is set that after the sending out of the tray 600 to the A ward is completed, the sending out of the tray 600 to the B ward is performed.
如图15所示，在要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出完成了时(S1)，升降控制部410判断是否已接收表示允许要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的发出的用户输入(S2)。As shown in FIG. 15 , when the sending out of the tray 600 to be transported to the A ward is completed ( S1 ), the lifting control unit 410 determines whether a user input indicating permission to send out the tray 600 to be transported to the B ward has been received ( S2 ).
在接收了上述用户输入时(S2中为“是”)，升降控制部410在托盘保管架60中，将以下的保管位置确定为要被搬运到B病房的最初的托盘600的保管位置，其中，该保管位置是指：从作为要被搬运到A病房的托盘600而最后发出的保管位置空开一个后的保管位置。然后，升降控制部410通过控制托盘输送部301，将要被搬运到B病房的最初的托盘600输送到所确定的保管位置(S3)。When receiving the user input ("Yes" in S2), the lifting control unit 410 determines the following storage position in the tray storage rack 60 as the storage position of the first tray 600 to be transported to ward B, wherein the storage position is a storage position that is one vacant from the storage position that was last sent out as the tray 600 to be transported to ward A. Then, the lifting control unit 410 controls the tray transport unit 301 to transport the first tray 600 to be transported to ward B to the determined storage position (S3).
另一方面，当判断为：在直至要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出完成为止，未接收到上述用户输入时(S2中为“否”)，升降控制部410通知要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的发出已完成这一情况(S4)。具体地，触摸面板控制部470通过控制触摸面板70，从而使触摸面板70显示用于接收要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的发出许可的图像。On the other hand, when it is determined that the user input is not received until the delivery of the tray 600 to be transported to ward A is completed (No in S2), the lifting control unit 410 notifies that the delivery of the tray 600 to be transported to ward A is completed (S4). Specifically, the touch panel control unit 470 controls the touch panel 70 so that the touch panel 70 displays an image for receiving permission to deliver the tray 600 to be transported to ward B.
升降控制部410监控是否通过上述图像接收了上述发出许可(S5)。当判断为接收了上述发出许可时(S5中为“是”)，升降控制部410执行S3的处理。升降控制部410执行S5的处理，直至经过了规定的时间(S5中为“否”时)。当未接收到上述发出许可而经过了规定的时间时，升降控制部410结束托盘600的发出处理。The lifting control unit 410 monitors whether the above-mentioned permission to send out is received through the above-mentioned image (S5). When it is determined that the above-mentioned permission to send out is received ("Yes" in S5), the lifting control unit 410 executes the process of S3. The lifting control unit 410 executes the process of S5 until a prescribed time has passed ("No" in S5). When the prescribed time has passed without receiving the above-mentioned permission to send out, the lifting control unit 410 ends the process of sending out the tray 600.
<其他升降装置的控制例><Other lifting device control examples>
升降装置300也可以通过上述以外的其他方法，将要被搬运到任意场所的托盘600(第一托盘组)和要被搬运到不同场所的托盘600(第二托盘组)，分别发出到托盘保管架60。以下，以下述情况为例进行说明：即，在要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的向托盘保管架60的发出完成之后，进行要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的向托盘保管架60的发出。The lifting device 300 may send out the pallets 600 to be transported to any place (first pallet group) and the pallets 600 to be transported to different places (second pallet group) to the pallet storage rack 60 respectively by other methods than those described above. Hereinafter, the following case is described as an example: after the pallets 600 to be transported to ward A are sent out to the pallet storage rack 60, the pallets 600 to be transported to ward B are sent out to the pallet storage rack 60.
(控制例一)(Control Example 1)
升降控制部410也可以构成为：在将要被搬运到A病房的托盘600发出到托盘保管架60(第一托盘保管架)之后，即使该托盘保管架60中有空余区域，也将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600发出到与上述托盘保管架60不同的其他托盘保管架60(第二托盘保管架)。例如，升降控制部410构成为：当检测到设置有第二托盘保管架时，在要被搬运到A病房的所有托盘600全部被发出到第一托盘保管架之后，开始将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600向第二托盘保管架发出。The lifting control unit 410 may also be configured to, after the pallets 600 to be transported to ward A are sent to the pallet storage rack 60 (first pallet storage rack), send the pallets 600 to be transported to ward B to another pallet storage rack 60 (second pallet storage rack) different from the pallet storage rack 60 even if there is a vacant area in the pallet storage rack 60. For example, when the installation of the second pallet storage rack is detected, the lifting control unit 410 starts sending the pallets 600 to be transported to ward B to the second pallet storage rack after all the pallets 600 to be transported to ward A are sent to the first pallet storage rack.
升降控制部410也可以构成为：在例如接收了由用户对第二托盘保管架的发出许可时，开始对第二托盘保管架发出托盘600。另外，升降控制部410也可以构成为：在利用设置检测部(未图示)检测到托盘保管架60被设置在插入口53中时，开始对第二托盘保管架发出托盘600。设置检测部是检测托盘保管架60有无设置在插入口53中的装置，例如设置在托盘发出装置50的框体51中。该情况下，能够自动开始托盘600向第二托盘保管架的发出，而无需接收由用户发出的向第二托盘保管架的发出许可。The lifting control unit 410 may be configured to start sending out the pallet 600 to the second pallet storage rack when, for example, permission to send out the pallet 600 to the second pallet storage rack is received from the user. In addition, the lifting control unit 410 may be configured to start sending out the pallet 600 to the second pallet storage rack when the setting detection unit (not shown) detects that the pallet storage rack 60 is set in the insertion port 53. The setting detection unit is a device that detects whether the pallet storage rack 60 is set in the insertion port 53, and is provided in the frame 51 of the pallet sending device 50, for example. In this case, sending out the pallet 600 to the second pallet storage rack can be automatically started without receiving permission to send out the pallet 600 to the second pallet storage rack from the user.
另外，在使用自动向插入口53输送托盘保管架60的托盘保管架输送系统(未图示)时，用户无需将托盘保管架60设置在插入口53中。在与设置检测部一起使用了托盘保管架输送系统的情况下，自动进行下一托盘保管架60的设置以及托盘600向下一托盘保管架60的发出。因此，用户既不需要发出上述发出许可，也不需要进行托盘保管架60的设置。In addition, when a pallet storage rack conveying system (not shown) is used for automatically conveying the pallet storage rack 60 to the insertion port 53, the user does not need to set the pallet storage rack 60 in the insertion port 53. When the pallet storage rack conveying system is used together with the setting detection unit, the next pallet storage rack 60 is automatically set and the pallet 600 is sent to the next pallet storage rack 60. Therefore, the user does not need to issue the above-mentioned sending permission, nor does he need to set the pallet storage rack 60.
(控制例二)(Control Example 2)
升降控制部410也可以构成为：在将要被搬运到A病房的托盘600发出至托盘保管架60之后，判断托盘保管架60中是否存在空余区域。而且，在判断为存在空余区域时，升降控制部410也可以不接收上述发出许可的情况下，将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600发出至空余区域。如上所述，升降控制部410也可以将要被搬运到A病房的托盘600和要被搬运到B病房的托盘600隔开而保管在托盘保管架60中，以能够从视觉上区分要被搬运到A病房的托盘600和要被搬运到B病房的托盘600。The lifting control unit 410 may also be configured to determine whether there is an empty area in the tray storage rack 60 after the tray 600 to be transported to ward A is sent to the tray storage rack 60. Furthermore, when it is determined that there is an empty area, the lifting control unit 410 may send the tray 600 to be transported to ward B to the empty area without receiving the above-mentioned permission to send. As described above, the lifting control unit 410 may separate the tray 600 to be transported to ward A and the tray 600 to be transported to ward B and store them in the tray storage rack 60 so that the tray 600 to be transported to ward A and the tray 600 to be transported to ward B can be visually distinguished.
(控制例三)(Control Example 3)
升降控制部410也可以构成为：在判断为无法将要被搬运到B病房的所有托盘600全部保管于空余区域中时，通知用户在插入口53中设置其他托盘保管架60。例如，升降控制部410通知触摸面板控制部470，以在触摸面板70上显示用于提醒用户在插入口53中设置其他托盘保管架60的图像。触摸面板控制部470接收该通知并使触摸面板70显示该图像。The lifting control unit 410 may also be configured to notify the user to set another tray storage rack 60 in the insertion port 53 when it is determined that all the trays 600 to be transported to the B ward cannot be stored in the vacant area. For example, the lifting control unit 410 notifies the touch panel control unit 470 to display an image on the touch panel 70 for reminding the user to set another tray storage rack 60 in the insertion port 53. The touch panel control unit 470 receives the notification and causes the touch panel 70 to display the image.
在此，控制装置400的存储部(未图示)根据例如处方数据存储要被搬运到各病房的托盘600的总数。另外，存储有被设置于插入口53的托盘保管架60中的托盘600的保管总数。由此，在每次将托盘600保管至托盘保管架60中时，升降控制部410能够计算出托盘600的发出剩余数和托盘保管架60中的托盘600的保管剩余数(托盘保管架60的空余区域的大小)。Here, the storage unit (not shown) of the control device 400 stores the total number of trays 600 to be transported to each ward based on, for example, prescription data. In addition, the total number of trays 600 stored in the tray storage rack 60 provided at the insertion port 53 is stored. Thus, each time a tray 600 is stored in the tray storage rack 60, the lifting control unit 410 can calculate the number of trays 600 to be sent out and the number of trays 600 to be stored in the tray storage rack 60 (the size of the free area of the tray storage rack 60).
升降控制部410例如在判断为保管有要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的托盘保管架60的托盘600的保管剩余数小于要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的总数时，通知用户在插入口53中设置其他托盘保管架60。即，升降控制部410在判断为虽然托盘保管架60中存在空余区域，但是无法将要被搬运到B病房的所有托盘600发出(收纳)至该托盘保管架60时，通知用户在插入口53中设置其他托盘保管架60。该情况下，即使托盘保管架60中存在空余区域，也能够将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600发出至其他托盘保管架60。For example, when the lifting control unit 410 determines that the number of trays 600 remaining in the tray storage rack 60 storing the trays 600 to be transported to ward A is less than the total number of trays 600 to be transported to ward B, the lifting control unit 410 notifies the user to set another tray storage rack 60 in the insertion port 53. That is, when the lifting control unit 410 determines that although there is a vacant area in the tray storage rack 60, all the trays 600 to be transported to ward B cannot be sent out (stored) to the tray storage rack 60, the lifting control unit 410 notifies the user to set another tray storage rack 60 in the insertion port 53. In this case, even if there is a vacant area in the tray storage rack 60, the trays 600 to be transported to ward B can be sent out to the other tray storage rack 60.
该情况下，升降控制部410例如也可以在接收到上述发出许可时、或者上述设置检测部检测到其他托盘保管架60的设置时，开始将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600向其他托盘保管架60发出。In this case, the lifting control unit 410 may start sending the tray 600 to be transported to ward B to the other tray storage rack 60 when, for example, the sending permission is received or the installation detection unit detects the installation of the other tray storage rack 60 .
另外，升降控制部410例如即使在判断为保管有要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的托盘保管架60的托盘600的保管剩余数小于要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的总数时，也可以将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600保管至该空余区域中，直到该托盘保管架60的空余区域被托盘600填满为止。该情况下，升降控制部410将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600发出至该托盘保管架60，直到保管剩余数变为0，并且，在保管剩余数变为0时，暂时停止该发出。然后，升降控制部410例如在接收到上述发出许可时、或者上述设置检测部检测到其他托盘保管架60的设置时，开始将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600向其他托盘保管架60发出。由此，能够将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600保管在互不相同的托盘保管架60中。Furthermore, even when the lifting control unit 410 determines that the number of pallets 600 remaining in the tray storage rack 60 storing the pallets 600 to be transported to ward A is less than the total number of pallets 600 to be transported to ward B, the pallets 600 to be transported to ward B may be stored in the vacant area until the vacant area of the pallet storage rack 60 is filled with pallets 600. In this case, the lifting control unit 410 sends the pallets 600 to be transported to ward B to the pallet storage rack 60 until the number of pallets remaining becomes 0, and temporarily stops sending when the number of pallets remaining becomes 0. Then, the lifting control unit 410 starts sending the pallets 600 to be transported to ward B to other pallet storage racks 60, for example, when the sending permission is received or when the installation detection unit detects the installation of other pallet storage racks 60. Thus, the trays 600 to be transported to the B ward can be stored in the tray storage racks 60 that are different from each other.
如此，在判断为上述托盘600的保管剩余数小于要被搬运到B病房的托盘600的总数时，例如，执行以下两个处理中的任意一者。In this way, when it is determined that the remaining number of the above-mentioned trays 600 is less than the total number of the trays 600 to be transported to the B ward, for example, one of the following two processes is executed.
(1)、即使保管要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的托盘保管架60中存在空余区域，也将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600保管至与该托盘保管架60不同的其他托盘保管架60中。(1) Even if there is a vacant area in the tray storage rack 60 storing the tray 600 to be transported to ward A, the tray 600 to be transported to ward B is stored in another tray storage rack 60 different from the tray storage rack 60.
(2)、将要被搬运到B病房的托盘600保管至用于保管要被搬运到A病房的托盘600的托盘保管架60中直至空余区域不存在之后，将剩余的托盘600保管至其他托盘保管架60中。(2) The pallets 600 to be transported to Ward B are stored in the pallet storage rack 60 used to store the pallets 600 to be transported to Ward A until there is no empty space left, and then the remaining pallets 600 are stored in other pallet storage racks 60 .
此时，关于升降控制部410执行上述(1)和(2)中的哪一者，可以通过预先设定而决定，也可以通过如上判定时的用户选择而决定。At this time, which of the above (1) and (2) is to be executed by the lifting control unit 410 may be determined by a preset setting or by a user selection during the above determination.
<其他的构成><Other components>
在托盘发出装置50的框体51中设置有固定部件，该固定部件用于在托盘保管架60被插入到插入口53时，将托盘保管架60临时固定。固定部件例如是磁铁。通过设置固定部件，可以防止在利用托盘发出装置50发出托盘600的期间，托盘保管架60发生移动。A fixing member is provided in the frame 51 of the pallet sending device 50, and the fixing member is used to temporarily fix the pallet storage rack 60 when the pallet storage rack 60 is inserted into the insertion port 53. The fixing member is, for example, a magnet. By providing the fixing member, the pallet storage rack 60 can be prevented from moving while the pallet sending device 50 sends out the pallet 600.
固定部件也可以连接于水平方向的旋转轴，并且安装成能够围绕该旋转轴旋转。由此，即使托盘保管架60相对于托盘发出装置50以倾斜的状态被插入，通过移动托盘保管架60，也能够使托盘发出装置50和托盘保管架60呈大致平行状态。因此，能够抑制由于托盘保管架60相对于托盘发出装置50倾斜而引起的、在将托盘600插入任意保管位置时，托盘600被卡在保管位置这一情况的发生。The fixing member may be connected to a horizontal rotation axis and installed to be rotatable around the rotation axis. Thus, even if the pallet storage rack 60 is inserted in a tilted state relative to the pallet delivery device 50, the pallet delivery device 50 and the pallet storage rack 60 can be made substantially parallel by moving the pallet storage rack 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pallet 600 from being stuck at a storage position when the pallet 600 is inserted into any storage position due to the tilt of the pallet storage rack 60 relative to the pallet delivery device 50.
[卡片支架][Card holder]
接下来，对卡片支架500的详细情况进行说明。图16是表示卡片支架500的结构例的图。图16的16001表示从正面侧观察卡片支架500时的俯视图，图16的16002表示从背面侧观察卡片支架500时的俯视图。另外，图16中的16003表示沿图16的16001所示的A-A线的卡片支架500的剖面图。Next, the card holder 500 will be described in detail. FIG16 is a diagram showing a structural example of the card holder 500. 16001 in FIG16 shows a top view of the card holder 500 when viewed from the front side, and 16002 in FIG16 shows a top view of the card holder 500 when viewed from the back side. In addition, 16003 in FIG16 shows a cross-sectional view of the card holder 500 taken along the line A-A shown in 16001 in FIG16.
卡片支架500是设置在托盘600的侧面上且保持重写卡RC的部件。如图16中的16001所示，卡片支架500具备形成开口部的外缘部511和载置重写卡RC的底部512。经由外缘部511所形成的开口部，进行重写卡RC从卡片支架500的拔除、或重写卡RC向卡片支架500的安装(插入)。另外，由外缘部511和底部512限定的空间(图中以虚线包围的矩形区域)作为保持(安装)重写卡RC的卡片安装部513发挥作用。另外，该矩形区域与重写卡RC的大小大致一致。The card holder 500 is a component that is disposed on the side of the tray 600 and holds the rewrite card RC. As shown in 16001 in FIG. 16 , the card holder 500 has an outer edge portion 511 that forms an opening and a bottom portion 512 that carries the rewrite card RC. The rewrite card RC is removed from the card holder 500 or installed (inserted) into the card holder 500 through the opening formed by the outer edge portion 511. In addition, the space defined by the outer edge portion 511 and the bottom portion 512 (the rectangular area surrounded by dotted lines in the figure) functions as a card installation portion 513 that holds (installs) the rewrite card RC. In addition, the rectangular area is roughly the same size as the rewrite card RC.
卡片支架500例如通过将限定外缘部511的上部部件和限定底部512的下部部件接合而形成。上部部件和下部部件例如为树脂。The card holder 500 is formed, for example, by joining an upper member defining an outer edge portion 511 and a lower member defining a bottom portion 512. The upper member and the lower member are made of, for example, resin.
另外，对上部部件和下部部件的、成为卡片支架500的正面侧的表面实施用于减少光反射的加工。例如，在该表面上形成有微细的凹凸形状(例如：表面粗化加工)。由此，在卡片检测部176向卡片支架500照射了光时，能够抑制外缘部511或底部512对该光的反射。因此，可提高重写卡RC的检测精度。In addition, the surface of the upper and lower components, which is the front side of the card holder 500, is processed to reduce light reflection. For example, fine concave and convex shapes are formed on the surface (for example, surface roughening). As a result, when the card detection unit 176 irradiates light to the card holder 500, the reflection of the light by the outer edge 511 or the bottom 512 can be suppressed. Therefore, the detection accuracy of the rewritable card RC can be improved.
另外，若不考虑上述检测精度的提高，则并不一定必须要实施上述加工。另外，也可以通过将一块板状部件进行成形而制造卡片支架500。In addition, if the improvement of the detection accuracy is not considered, the above processing is not necessarily required. In addition, the card holder 500 may be manufactured by molding a single plate-like member.
在外缘部511的相对的部分上设置有一对爪部514。在本实施方式中，在卡片支架500的两个短边上的卡片支架500的拐角部附近处设置有四个爪部514a～514d。由爪部514a及514b这一组和爪部514c及514d这一组构成一对爪部514。A pair of claws 514 is provided at the opposite parts of the outer edge 511. In the present embodiment, four claws 514a to 514d are provided near the corners of the card holder 500 on the two short sides of the card holder 500. A pair of claws 514 is formed by a set of claws 514a and 514b and a set of claws 514c and 514d.
一对爪部514沿着重写卡RC的变形方向突出，该变形方向是指：重写卡RC边弯曲边被从卡片支架500的正面拔除时、或者重写卡RC边弯曲边被从卡片支架500的正面安装时的重写卡RC的变形方向。在本实施方式中，上述变形方向是图16中的16001和16003所示的箭头方向(长边延伸的方向)。具体而言，爪部514从卡片支架500的两短边(具体为外缘部511的第二侧壁511b)朝向外缘部511所形成的开口部侧(卡片支架500的内侧)突出。另外，将长边侧的外缘部511的侧壁称为第一侧壁511a，将短边侧的外缘部511的侧壁称为第二侧壁511b。The pair of claws 514 protrude along the deformation direction of the rewrite card RC, which refers to the deformation direction of the rewrite card RC when the rewrite card RC is pulled out from the front of the card holder 500 while being bent, or when the rewrite card RC is installed from the front of the card holder 500 while being bent. In the present embodiment, the deformation direction is the direction of the arrows 16001 and 16003 shown in FIG. 16 (the direction in which the long side extends). Specifically, the claws 514 protrude from the two short sides of the card holder 500 (specifically, the second side wall 511b of the outer edge 511) toward the opening side formed by the outer edge 511 (the inner side of the card holder 500). In addition, the side wall of the outer edge 511 on the long side is called the first side wall 511a, and the side wall of the outer edge 511 on the short side is called the second side wall 511b.
通过设置爪部514，在爪部514与包括底部512的平面之间(以下，也称为爪部514与底部512之间)，可形成在保持着重写卡RC的状态下其外缘部的一部分应被插入的间隙。通过设置爪部514，能够在重写卡RC的端部处保持被恢复原始状态的重写卡RC，其中，恢复原始状态的重写卡RC是通过从卡片支架500的正面(外缘部511所形成的开口部)相对于卡片支架500以弯曲的状态被推顶而恢复为原始状态。也就是说，爪部514作为重写卡RC的防脱部发挥作用。另外，能够将被保持在卡片支架500中的重写卡RC，以弯曲状态从卡片支架500正面拔除。尤其是，通过将爪部514设置成朝向上述变形方向突出，由此，在将重写卡RC边弯曲边进行拔除或安装时，能够减小对爪部514的负荷。即，能够在使重写卡RC弯曲的同时顺畅地进行拔除或安装。因此，由于能够抑制重写卡RC的变形或损坏的发生，因而可延长重写卡RC的寿命。By providing the claw 514, a gap into which a part of the outer edge of the rewrite card RC should be inserted while the rewrite card RC is held can be formed between the claw 514 and the plane including the bottom 512 (hereinafter, also referred to as between the claw 514 and the bottom 512). By providing the claw 514, the rewrite card RC restored to its original state can be held at the end of the rewrite card RC, wherein the rewrite card RC restored to its original state is restored to its original state by being pushed from the front side of the card holder 500 (the opening formed by the outer edge 511) relative to the card holder 500 in a bent state. That is, the claw 514 functions as a detachment prevention portion of the rewrite card RC. In addition, the rewrite card RC held in the card holder 500 can be removed from the front side of the card holder 500 in a bent state. In particular, by providing the claw 514 to protrude toward the above-mentioned deformation direction, the load on the claw 514 can be reduced when the rewrite card RC is removed or installed while being bent. That is, the rewrite card RC can be smoothly removed or installed while being bent. Therefore, since the deformation or damage of the rewrite card RC can be suppressed, the life of the rewrite card RC can be extended.
另外，在本实施方式中，说明了在两个短边的相对的部分上设置爪部514的情况，但是也可以在两个长边的相对的部分上设置爪部514。爪部514只要设置为至少在上述变形方向上相对即可。另外，也可以在两个短边的相对的部分上设置一对爪部514的同时，在两个长边的相对的部分上也设置一对爪部514。即，设置有一对爪部514的上述相对的部分是：(1)外缘部511的在上述变形方向上相对的部分(例如：两个短边的相对的部分)，以及(2)外缘部511的在与上述变形方向垂直的方向上相对的部分(例如：两个长边的相对的部分)的至少任意一者。In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the claws 514 are provided on the opposite portions of the two short sides is described, but the claws 514 may also be provided on the opposite portions of the two long sides. The claws 514 only need to be provided so as to be opposite in at least the above-mentioned deformation direction. In addition, a pair of claws 514 may be provided on the opposite portions of the two short sides, and a pair of claws 514 may also be provided on the opposite portions of the two long sides. That is, the above-mentioned opposite portions provided with a pair of claws 514 are: (1) the opposite portions of the outer edge portion 511 in the above-mentioned deformation direction (for example: the opposite portions of the two short sides), and (2) the opposite portions of the outer edge portion 511 in the direction perpendicular to the above-mentioned deformation direction (for example: the opposite portions of the two long sides).
另外，如图16中的16003所示，爪部514的与开口部517相对的内壁以下述方式倾斜：即，从外缘部511(在本实施方式中为第二侧壁511b(短边侧))朝向卡片支架500的内侧，爪部514与底部512之间的高度Hi变大。In addition, as shown in 16003 in Figure 16, the inner wall of the claw portion 514 opposite to the opening portion 517 is inclined in the following manner: that is, from the outer edge portion 511 (in this embodiment, the second side wall 511b (short side)) toward the inner side of the card holder 500, the height Hi between the claw portion 514 and the bottom 512 becomes larger.
因此，能够抑制边弯曲边被拔除或安装的重写卡RC卡在爪部514或底部512上的情况的发生。例如，即使在重写卡RC劣化而变得容易被卡住时，也能够抑制该卡住情况的发生。因此，能够提高重写卡RC的拔除或安装的精度。另外，由于能够减小施加于重写卡RC上的负荷，因此可防止重写卡RC变形等的发生。另外，若不考虑这一点，则爪部514的上述内壁，也可以例如与底部512大致平行地延伸。Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rewrite card RC, which is being removed or installed while being bent, from getting stuck on the claw portion 514 or the bottom portion 512. For example, even when the rewrite card RC deteriorates and becomes easily stuck, the occurrence of the stuck situation can be prevented. Therefore, the precision of removing or installing the rewrite card RC can be improved. In addition, since the load applied to the rewrite card RC can be reduced, the rewrite card RC can be prevented from being deformed. In addition, if this point is not taken into consideration, the above-mentioned inner wall of the claw portion 514 can also extend, for example, roughly parallel to the bottom portion 512.
另外，在外缘部511(具体为外缘部511的拐角部附近)设有卡片引导部515，当相对于卡片支架500以弯曲状态被推抵的重写卡RC的角部RCc接触时，卡片引导部515将该角部RCc引导向一对爪部514。In addition, a card guide portion 515 is provided at the outer edge portion 511 (specifically near the corner portion of the outer edge portion 511). When the corner RCc of the rewrite card RC pushed against the card holder 500 in a bent state contacts the card, the card guide portion 515 guides the corner RCc toward a pair of claws 514.
具体地，如图16中的16001所示，卡片引导部515设置成：当俯视卡片支架500时，将外缘部511所形成的开口部的拐角部形成为大致曲线形状(大致C形)而形成。换言之，卡片引导部515在设置有爪部514的短边侧区域中，以从卡片支架500的内侧朝向短边侧而上述开口部的在短边延伸方向上的宽度变短这一方式，设置在卡片支架500的角部。进一步换言之，卡片引导部515在上述区域中，以朝向重写卡RC边弯曲边被安装时重写卡RC延伸的方向，使上述开口部的与该方向大致垂直方向的宽度变短这一方式，设置在卡片支架500的角部。在本实施方式中，卡片引导部515是从第一侧壁511a朝向爪部514侧(第二侧壁511b侧)延伸的侧壁。Specifically, as shown in 16001 in FIG. 16 , the card guide 515 is provided so that the corner of the opening formed by the outer edge 511 is formed into a substantially curved shape (substantially C-shaped) when the card holder 500 is viewed from above. In other words, the card guide 515 is provided at the corner of the card holder 500 in the short side region where the claw 514 is provided so that the width of the above-mentioned opening in the direction in which the short side extends becomes shorter from the inside of the card holder 500 toward the short side. In further other words, the card guide 515 is provided at the corner of the card holder 500 in the above region so that the width of the above-mentioned opening in the direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the rewrite card RC extends when the rewrite card RC is installed while being bent toward the above direction becomes shorter. In the present embodiment, the card guide 515 is a side wall extending from the first side wall 511a toward the claw 514 side (the second side wall 511b side).
换句话说，卡片引导部515是限定重写卡RC被安装的区域(即，外缘部511所形成的开口部)的、外缘部511的一部分。卡片引导部515以下述方式设置于上述开口部的角部，即，当俯视卡片支架500时，在上述开口部的端部处，朝向上述重写卡RC延伸的方向而使与该方向大致垂直方向的宽度变短这一方式。上述开口部的端部在本例中为上述短边侧的区域。In other words, the card guide 515 is a part of the outer edge 511 that defines the area where the rewrite card RC is installed (i.e., the opening formed by the outer edge 511). The card guide 515 is provided at the corner of the opening in such a manner that, when the card holder 500 is viewed from above, the width of the end of the opening is shortened in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the rewrite card RC extends. In this example, the end of the opening is the area on the short side.
在此，设定为较之卡片安装部513向长边侧偏移而安装重写卡RC。此时，重写卡RC在从弯曲状态恢复为原始状态的同时被安装，并与限定卡片引导部515的侧壁接触。与卡片引导部515接触的重写卡RC的角部RCc沿着侧壁被从第一侧壁511a侧引导向第二侧壁511b侧。如上所述，重写卡RC的角部RCc通过形成为曲线形状，从而容易被卡片引导部515引导，其中，该卡片引导部515将外缘部511所形成的开口部的端部限定为大致C形。其结果是，通过将重写卡RC的端部插入爪部514和底部512之间，从而利用爪部514保持重写卡RC。Here, the rewrite card RC is installed so as to be offset to the long side compared to the card installation part 513. At this time, the rewrite card RC is installed while returning to the original state from the bent state, and contacts the side wall defining the card guide part 515. The corner RCc of the rewrite card RC contacting the card guide part 515 is guided from the first side wall 511a side to the second side wall 511b side along the side wall. As described above, the corner RCc of the rewrite card RC is formed into a curved shape, so that it is easy to be guided by the card guide part 515, wherein the card guide part 515 defines the end of the opening formed by the outer edge part 511 as a roughly C shape. As a result, the rewrite card RC is held by the claw part 514 by inserting the end of the rewrite card RC between the claw part 514 and the bottom 512.
如此，通过设置卡片引导部515，即使在向长边侧(与上述变形方向不同的方向)偏移而安装重写卡RC的情况下，也能够使重写卡RC向保持重写卡RC的规定位置移动。因此，即使在安装重写卡RC时发生了错位，也能够利用爪部514保持重写卡RC。Thus, by providing the card guide 515, even when the rewrite card RC is installed with a deviation toward the long side (in a direction different from the deformation direction), the rewrite card RC can be moved to a predetermined position for holding the rewrite card RC. Therefore, even when the rewrite card RC is displaced when it is installed, the claw 514 can hold the rewrite card RC.
另外，在底部512上设置有通气孔516。如上所述，通过吸附将重写卡RC从卡片支架500中拔除。在未设置通气孔516的情况下，当吸引了重写卡RC时，在该吸引力的作用下，不仅重写卡RC被吸附，而且，卡片支架500本身也可能经由重写卡RC而被吸附。该情况下，无法拔除重写卡RC。In addition, a vent hole 516 is provided on the bottom 512. As described above, the rewrite card RC is removed from the card holder 500 by suction. In the case where the vent hole 516 is not provided, when the rewrite card RC is sucked, not only the rewrite card RC is sucked under the effect of the suction force, but also the card holder 500 itself may be sucked through the rewrite card RC. In this case, the rewrite card RC cannot be removed.
在设有通气孔516的情况下，当吸引了重写卡RC时，能够使重写卡RC与底部512之间不会成为真空状态，因此，能够使吸引卡片支架500的力减小。因此，能够高精度地拔除重写卡RC。但是，在即使吸引力(吸附力)比较小时也能够拔除重写卡RC的情况下，并不一定必须要设置通气孔516。When the vent hole 516 is provided, when the rewrite card RC is sucked, the space between the rewrite card RC and the bottom 512 will not be in a vacuum state, so the force of sucking the card holder 500 can be reduced. Therefore, the rewrite card RC can be removed with high accuracy. However, in the case where the rewrite card RC can be removed even when the suction force (adsorption force) is relatively small, the vent hole 516 is not necessarily required.
另外，如图16中的16001～16003所示，在底部512的至少与爪部514相对的区域中设置有开口部517。In addition, as shown in 16001 to 16003 in FIG. 16 , an opening 517 is provided in at least a region of the bottom portion 512 that faces the claw portion 514 .
重写卡RC是在弯曲的同时被拔除或被安装。因此，在未设有开口部517的情况下，有可能重写卡RC的端部在爪部514和底部512之间会被卡在爪部514或底部512上，从而有可能无法拔除或安装重写卡RC。Therefore, if the opening 517 is not provided, the end of the rewrite card RC may be stuck on the claw 514 or the bottom 512 between the claw 514 and the bottom 512, and the rewrite card RC may not be removed or installed.
通过在上述区域中设置开口部517，能够抑制重写卡RC卡住的可能性。因此，能够提高重写卡RC的拔除或安装的精度。另外，由于能够减小施加到重写卡RC上的负荷，因此能够抑制重写卡RC的变形等。By providing the opening 517 in the above-mentioned area, the possibility of the rewrite card RC getting stuck can be suppressed. Therefore, the accuracy of removing or installing the rewrite card RC can be improved. In addition, since the load applied to the rewrite card RC can be reduced, the deformation of the rewrite card RC can be suppressed.
另外，如图16中的16003所示，底部512是平坦的。在底部512上设置有凹部(后述)的情况下，重写卡RC容易拔除，但是，重写卡RC掉落的可能性相应增大。在底部512平坦时，能够抑制重写卡RC掉落的可能性。然而，通过对凹部的大小、形状、深度以及形成位置等进行研究，能够降低掉落的可能性的话，则也可以在底部512上设置凹部来代替开口部517。该情况下，能够容易地进行重写卡RC的拔除。In addition, as shown in 16003 in FIG. 16 , the bottom 512 is flat. When a recess (described later) is provided on the bottom 512, the rewrite card RC is easy to be pulled out, but the possibility of the rewrite card RC falling is increased accordingly. When the bottom 512 is flat, the possibility of the rewrite card RC falling can be suppressed. However, if the possibility of falling can be reduced by studying the size, shape, depth and formation position of the recess, a recess can be provided on the bottom 512 instead of the opening 517. In this case, the rewrite card RC can be easily pulled out.
<变形例><Modification>
接下来，对卡片支架500的变形例进行说明。图17～图19是表示卡片支架500的变形例的图。Next, a modification of the card holder 500 will be described. FIG. 17 to FIG. 19 are diagrams showing a modification of the card holder 500. FIG.
(卡片支架501及502)(Card holders 501 and 502)
图17中的17001是表示卡片支架501的结构例的俯视图。另外，图17中的17002是表示卡片支架502的结构例的俯视图。卡片支架501与卡片支架500的不同点在于，底部521的形状和卡片引导部515的形状不同。另外，卡片支架502在底部512为平坦的这一点上，与卡片支架501不同。17001 in FIG17 is a top view showing a configuration example of the card holder 501. In addition, 17002 in FIG17 is a top view showing a configuration example of the card holder 502. The card holder 501 is different from the card holder 500 in the shape of the bottom 521 and the shape of the card guide 515. In addition, the card holder 502 is different from the card holder 501 in that the bottom 512 is flat.
具体而言，卡片支架501的底部521上设置有凹部522。凹部522设置成：在设有爪部514的两个短边延伸的方向上延伸(在与上述变形方向大致垂直的方向上延伸)。凹部522设置在包括与爪部514相对的位置的、底部521的短边侧的端部区域中。换言之，卡片支架501在底部521的至少与爪部514相对的区域(端部区域)中，比底部521的其他区域低。Specifically, a recess 522 is provided on the bottom 521 of the card holder 501. The recess 522 is provided to extend in the direction in which the two short sides provided with the claw 514 extend (extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the above-mentioned deformation direction). The recess 522 is provided in an end region of the short side of the bottom 521 including a position opposite to the claw 514. In other words, the card holder 501 is lower than other regions of the bottom 521 in at least the region (end region) opposite to the claw 514 of the bottom 521.
如上所述，在上述端部区域中，重写卡RC的端部在爪部514与底部521之间，容易卡在爪部514或底部521上。在卡片支架501中，通过在上述端部区域中设置凹部522，与设置有开口部517时同样地，能够抑制该卡住的发生。As described above, in the end region, the end of the rewrite card RC is between the claw 514 and the bottom 521 and is easily caught on the claw 514 or the bottom 521. In the card holder 501, by providing the recess 522 in the end region, the occurrence of the jam can be suppressed in the same manner as when the opening 517 is provided.
另外，凹部522不必一定要设置在整个上述端部区域中。只要能够抑制上述卡住的发生，凹部522例如也可以设置在与爪部514a～514d分别相对的区域中。The recessed portion 522 does not necessarily have to be provided in the entire end region, and may be provided, for example, in regions facing the claws 514a to 514d as long as the occurrence of the seizure can be suppressed.
但是，如上所述，从减少所保持的重写卡RC掉落的情况这一观点出发，也可以为不设置凹部522的结构。如图17中的17002所示，卡片支架502是在卡片支架501中未设置凹部522(底部512是平坦的)时的结构例。然而，在卡片支架502中，虽然能够减少由于凹部522引起的上述掉落的发生，但是，当拔除或安装重写卡RC时，重写卡RC的端部有可能被爪部514或底部512卡住。也考虑这一点的话，最好如卡片支架500那样，在平坦的底部512上设置开口部517，来代替凹部522。However, as described above, from the viewpoint of reducing the possibility of the held rewrite card RC falling, a structure without the recess 522 may be used. As shown in 17002 in FIG. 17 , the card holder 502 is a structural example in which the recess 522 is not provided in the card holder 501 (the bottom 512 is flat). However, in the card holder 502, although the occurrence of the above-mentioned falling caused by the recess 522 can be reduced, when the rewrite card RC is removed or installed, the end of the rewrite card RC may be caught by the claw 514 or the bottom 512. Considering this point, it is better to provide an opening 517 on the flat bottom 512 instead of the recess 522 as in the card holder 500.
另外，卡片支架501及502的卡片引导部523，从外缘部511的顶面部511c(外缘部511的一部分)朝向底部521的分别与爪部514a～514d相对的区域附近倾斜。卡片引导部523在长边侧的外缘部511的与爪部514连接的位置处，从顶面部511c朝向上述端部区域倾斜。另外，卡片引导部523中的倾斜区域，随着朝向爪部514而变大。In addition, the card guide 523 of the card holders 501 and 502 is inclined from the top surface 511c (a part of the outer edge 511) of the outer edge 511 toward the vicinity of the area of the bottom 521 that is opposite to the claws 514a to 514d. The card guide 523 is inclined from the top surface 511c toward the above-mentioned end area at the position where the outer edge 511 on the long side is connected to the claw 514. In addition, the inclined area in the card guide 523 becomes larger as it goes toward the claw 514.
由此，即使在重写卡RC向长边侧偏移而安装的情况下，重写卡RC的端部也经由上述倾斜区域被插入至底部521或底部512的与爪部514相对的位置。因此，即使在重写卡RC安装时发生了错位的情况下，也能够利用爪部514保持重写卡RC。Thus, even when the rewrite card RC is installed with a deviation toward the long side, the end of the rewrite card RC is inserted through the inclined region to a position of the bottom 521 or the bottom 512 that is opposite to the claw 514. Therefore, even when the rewrite card RC is misaligned during installation, the claw 514 can hold the rewrite card RC.
然而，根据重写卡RC的经年劣化(角部RCc的变形或损坏)等、重写卡RC的状态，有可能发生被卡片引导部523引导的重写卡RC的端部在插入爪部514中时被爪部514卡住这一情况。在卡片引导部515的情况下，并不是如卡片引导部523那样，从顶面部511c朝向底部521或底部512倾斜。即，卡片引导部515由从底部521或底部512大致垂直地立起的侧壁形成，并且，将外缘部511所形成的开口部的端部限定为大致C形。因此，可以减少如上的卡住的发生。However, depending on the state of the rewrite card RC, such as the deterioration of the rewrite card RC over the years (deformation or damage of the corner RCc), the end of the rewrite card RC guided by the card guide 523 may be caught by the claw 514 when inserted into the claw 514. In the case of the card guide 515, it is not inclined from the top surface 511c toward the bottom 521 or the bottom 512 as the card guide 523. That is, the card guide 515 is formed by a side wall that stands up approximately vertically from the bottom 521 or the bottom 512, and the end of the opening formed by the outer edge 511 is defined as a substantially C-shape. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-mentioned jamming can be reduced.
(卡片支架503及504)(Card holders 503 and 504)
图18中的18001所示的卡片支架503与卡片支架500的不同点在于：卡片支架503包括在上述端部区域中设有凹部532的底部531和设置在整个短边上的爪部533。在卡片支架500中，爪部514设置在短边的一部分上(具体是在各短边的两个位置处)。即使为爪部533的形状，也能够与卡片支架501同样地，在保持重写卡RC的同时，将重写卡RC边弯曲边进行拔除或安装。The card holder 503 shown in 18001 in FIG. 18 is different from the card holder 500 in that the card holder 503 includes a bottom 531 having a recess 532 in the end region and a claw 533 provided on the entire short side. In the card holder 500, the claw 514 is provided on a portion of the short side (specifically, at two positions on each short side). Even with the shape of the claw 533, the rewrite card RC can be removed or installed while being bent while holding the rewrite card RC, similarly to the card holder 501.
另外，在该结构中，如图18中的18001及18002所示，与图17的17001中所示的卡片支架501同样地，在底部531中设有凹部532。另外，图18的18002是将由虚线包围的部分沿长边方向切断时的卡片支架503的剖面图。In this structure, as shown in 18001 and 18002 in Fig. 18, a recess 532 is provided in the bottom 531, similarly to the card holder 501 shown in 17001 in Fig. 17. In addition, 18002 in Fig. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the card holder 503 when the portion surrounded by the dotted line is cut along the longitudinal direction.
如图18中的18002所示，在卡片支架503中，能够将从爪部533至底部531(凹部532)的距离D1(深度)，设置为长于无凹部532时(上述端部区域平坦时)的、从爪部533至底部(以虚线所示的位置)的距离D2。因此，即使重写卡RC朝向长边方向上稍微偏移而被插入并保持，如上所述，也能够抑制重写卡RC的端部卡在爪部533或底部531上。如此，在具有遍及整个短边而设置的爪部533的卡片支架503中，也能够提高重写卡RC的拔除精度。As shown in 18002 in FIG. 18 , in the card holder 503, the distance D1 (depth) from the claw 533 to the bottom 531 (recess 532) can be set to be longer than the distance D2 from the claw 533 to the bottom (position shown by the dotted line) when there is no recess 532 (when the above-mentioned end region is flat). Therefore, even if the rewrite card RC is inserted and held with a slight deviation in the long side direction, as described above, it is possible to prevent the end of the rewrite card RC from being caught on the claw 533 or the bottom 531. In this way, in the card holder 503 having the claw 533 provided over the entire short side, the removal accuracy of the rewrite card RC can also be improved.
图19中的19001所示的卡片支架504在设有卡片引导部551这一点上，与卡片支架503不同。与卡片引导部523同样地，卡片引导部551从外缘部511的第一侧壁511a(外缘部511的一部分)朝向底部531的与各爪部533相对的区域附近倾斜。具体地，如图19中的19002所示，卡片引导部551从第一侧壁511a朝向上述端部区域倾斜。通过设置卡片引导部551，与卡片引导部523同样地，即使在重写卡RC安装时发生了错位，也能够利用爪部533保持重写卡RC。The card holder 504 shown in 19001 in FIG. 19 is different from the card holder 503 in that a card guide 551 is provided. Similar to the card guide 523, the card guide 551 is inclined from the first side wall 511a (a part of the outer edge 511) of the outer edge 511 toward the vicinity of the area of the bottom 531 opposite to each claw 533. Specifically, as shown in 19002 in FIG. 19, the card guide 551 is inclined from the first side wall 511a toward the above-mentioned end area. By providing the card guide 551, similar to the card guide 523, even if the rewrite card RC is misaligned when it is installed, the claw 533 can be used to hold the rewrite card RC.
另外，在卡片支架504中，卡片引导部551仅设置在一对爪部533的各自的一端部侧。即，卡片引导部551设置在一个第一侧壁511a的端部附近的两处位置上。但是，不限于此，也可以在一对爪部533的各自的两端部上(即，在两个第一侧壁511a的每一个上，在其端部附近的两处位置上(总计四处位置))设置卡片引导部551。In addition, in the card holder 504, the card guide 551 is provided only on one end side of each of the pair of claws 533. That is, the card guide 551 is provided at two locations near the end of one first side wall 511a. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the card guide 551 may be provided at both ends of each of the pair of claws 533 (that is, at two locations near the end of each of the two first side walls 511a (four locations in total)).
[实施方式二][Implementation Method 2]
以下，对本发明的其他实施方式进行说明。另外，为了便于说明，对于与上述实施方式中说明的部件具有相同功能的部件，标以相同的附图标记并且不重复其说明。在以下的实施方式中也是相同。Hereinafter, other embodiments of the present invention will be described. In addition, for the sake of convenience, components having the same functions as those described in the above embodiments are marked with the same reference numerals and their descriptions are not repeated. This is also the case in the following embodiments.
在第二实施方式中，对取代托盘600而使用托盘610作为用于输送药剂的托盘时的卡片装卸装置150的动作例进行说明。在说明该动作例之前，对托盘610和设置在托盘610上的卡片支架510进行说明。In the second embodiment, an operation example of the card handling device 150 when the tray 610 is used as a tray for conveying medicines instead of the tray 600 will be described. Before describing this operation example, the tray 610 and the card holder 510 provided on the tray 610 will be described.
[托盘和卡片支架][Tray and card holder]
图21是表示托盘610的结构例的图。图22是表示卡片支架510的结构例的图。图22的22001是卡片支架510的主视图，图22的22002是卡片支架510的立体图。在图22的22001中示出重写卡RC被安装在卡片支架510中的状态。Fig. 21 is a diagram showing a structural example of a tray 610. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing a structural example of a card holder 510. 22001 of Fig. 22 is a front view of the card holder 510, and 22002 of Fig. 22 is a perspective view of the card holder 510. 22001 of Fig. 22 shows a state where the rewrite card RC is installed in the card holder 510.
与托盘600相同，托盘610是在发药系统1中将被从发药装置30发出的药剂等进行收纳的部件。收纳有药剂等的托盘610通过托盘发出装置50被发出至托盘保管架60。Similar to the tray 600, the tray 610 is a member for storing medicines and the like sent out from the medicine sending device 30 in the medicine sending system 1. The tray 610 storing medicines and the like is sent out to the tray storage rack 60 by the tray sending device 50.
在托盘610侧面的与卡片装卸装置150相对的位置上，取代卡片支架500，而设置有能够保持重写卡RC的卡片支架510(卡片保持部、第一卡片保持部)。其中，托盘610的高度比托盘600的高度低。因此，在将如图2所示那样托盘600上所设置的卡片支架500(与托盘600的侧面的高度大致相同)设置于托盘610的侧面时，卡片支架500的一部分从托盘610的侧面突出。在将托盘610彼此堆叠时，卡片支架500的突出部分彼此干扰，因此有可能无法堆叠托盘610。另外，卡片支架500的突出部分与构成发药系统1的各装置等发生干扰，因此有可能阻碍托盘610在发药系统1中的输送。因此，设置于托盘610的卡片支架510的高度在一定程度上受到限制。需要说明的是，卡片支架510的高度是卡片支架510的短边的长度(与重写卡RC的变形方向Dt大致垂直的方向上的长度)。At a position on the side of the tray 610 opposite to the card loading and unloading device 150, a card holder 510 (card holding portion, first card holding portion) capable of holding the rewrite card RC is provided instead of the card holder 500. The height of the tray 610 is lower than the height of the tray 600. Therefore, when the card holder 500 (which is substantially the same height as the side of the tray 600) provided on the tray 600 as shown in FIG. 2 is provided on the side of the tray 610, a part of the card holder 500 protrudes from the side of the tray 610. When the trays 610 are stacked on each other, the protruding parts of the card holder 500 interfere with each other, so that the trays 610 may not be stacked. In addition, the protruding parts of the card holder 500 interfere with the various devices constituting the medicine dispensing system 1, so that the transportation of the tray 610 in the medicine dispensing system 1 may be hindered. Therefore, the height of the card holder 510 provided on the tray 610 is limited to a certain extent. It should be noted that the height of the card holder 510 is the length of the short side of the card holder 510 (the length in a direction substantially perpendicular to the deformation direction Dt of the rewrite card RC).
另外，卡片支架510的短边的长度可根据托盘610的高度，而规定为相对于重写卡RC的短边的长度具有富余。因此，如图16所示，即使将卡片引导部515设置在由外缘部511形成的开口部的角部(短边的两端部)上，通过卡片引导部515，发生如上那样的干扰的可能性也低。另一方面，由于卡片支架510的高度受到一定程度的限制，因此在设置有卡片引导部515时，有可能会发生上述那样的干扰。In addition, the length of the short side of the card holder 510 can be set to have a margin relative to the length of the short side of the rewrite card RC according to the height of the tray 610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16, even if the card guide 515 is set at the corners (the two ends of the short side) of the opening formed by the outer edge 511, the possibility of the above-mentioned interference occurring through the card guide 515 is low. On the other hand, since the height of the card holder 510 is limited to a certain extent, when the card guide 515 is provided, the above-mentioned interference may occur.
因此，如图22中的22001所示，卡片支架510上未设置有卡片引导部515，并且卡片支架510的短边的长度被规定为与重写卡RC的短边的长度大致相同。由此，能够减小卡片支架510从托盘610的上部突出的量，从而能够降低发生上述那样的干扰的可能性。Therefore, as shown in 22001 in Fig. 22, the card holder 510 is not provided with a card guide 515, and the length of the short side of the card holder 510 is set to be substantially the same as the length of the short side of the rewrite card RC. Thus, the amount of the card holder 510 protruding from the upper part of the tray 610 can be reduced, thereby reducing the possibility of the above-mentioned interference.
另外，如图21所示，卡片支架510可以以从托盘610的底部朝向上部而远离托盘610的侧面的方式，相对于托盘610的侧面倾斜地设置。该情况下，能够使俯视设有卡片支架510的侧面时的、卡片支架510的短边的长度(卡片支架510的外观上的高度Ht)短于卡片支架510的短边的实际长度。由此，能够进一步减小上述突出量。另外，能够使卡片装卸装置150的卡片吸附部151和引导部152、153相对于卡片支架510大致平行地抵接。因此，能够利用引导部152、153和卡片支架510更稳定地保持解除了卡片吸附部151的吸引之后的重写卡RC。In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 , the card holder 510 may be arranged to be inclined relative to the side of the tray 610 in a manner that it moves from the bottom of the tray 610 toward the upper part and away from the side of the tray 610. In this case, the length of the short side of the card holder 510 (the apparent height Ht of the card holder 510) when looking down at the side on which the card holder 510 is provided can be made shorter than the actual length of the short side of the card holder 510. Thus, the above-mentioned protrusion amount can be further reduced. In addition, the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 of the card loading and unloading device 150 can be made to abut approximately parallel to the card holder 510. Therefore, the rewrite card RC after the attraction of the card adsorption portion 151 is released can be more stably held by the guide portions 152 and 153 and the card holder 510.
但是，在无法设置卡片引导部515的情况下，当重写卡RC相对于卡片支架510朝向短边方向偏移而抵接时，有可能无法校正该偏移。在无法校正偏移的情况下，有可能无法将重写卡RC插入到形成于卡片支架510的底部562与一对爪部564之间的间隙中(即，无法将重写卡RC安装至卡片支架510)。因此，为了降低发生偏移的可能性，卡片支架510不设置卡片引导部515，但却具有能够实现通过本实施方式的卡片装卸装置150安装重写卡RC的安装方法的结构。以下，对卡片支架510的结构以及通过卡片装卸装置150安装重写卡RC的安装方法(卡片装卸装置150的动作例)进行说明。However, in the case where the card guide 515 cannot be provided, when the rewrite card RC is offset in the short-side direction relative to the card holder 510 and abuts against it, the offset may not be corrected. In the case where the offset cannot be corrected, the rewrite card RC may not be inserted into the gap formed between the bottom 562 of the card holder 510 and the pair of claws 564 (that is, the rewrite card RC cannot be installed in the card holder 510). Therefore, in order to reduce the possibility of offset, the card holder 510 is not provided with the card guide 515, but has a structure that can realize the installation method of installing the rewrite card RC by the card loading and unloading device 150 of this embodiment. The structure of the card holder 510 and the installation method of installing the rewrite card RC by the card loading and unloading device 150 (an operation example of the card loading and unloading device 150) are described below.
如图22中的22002所示，与卡片支架500同样地，卡片支架510具备外缘部561和底部562。与卡片支架500同样地，外缘部561的侧壁限定了安装重写卡RC的区域。由外缘部561和底部562限定的空间作为卡片安装部563发挥作用，并且卡片安装部563限定上述区域。As shown at 22002 in FIG. 22 , the card holder 510 has an outer edge portion 561 and a bottom portion 562, similarly to the card holder 500. Similar to the card holder 500, the side wall of the outer edge portion 561 defines an area for installing the rewrite card RC. The space defined by the outer edge portion 561 and the bottom portion 562 functions as a card installation portion 563, and the card installation portion 563 defines the above-mentioned area.
在此，在本实施方式中，卡片装卸装置150使重写卡RC在从卡片安装部563(安装重写卡RC的区域)向图23所示的+z轴方向偏移了的位置上与卡片支架510抵接。也可以将俯视卡片支架510时的上述重写卡RC被安装的区域(位置)称为第一位置，将从第一位置偏移的位置称为第二位置。第二位置只要是重写卡RC的一部分能够与卡片支架510抵接的位置即可。Here, in this embodiment, the card loading and unloading device 150 makes the rewrite card RC abut against the card holder 510 at a position offset from the card mounting portion 563 (the area where the rewrite card RC is mounted) in the +z-axis direction shown in FIG. 23. The area (position) where the rewrite card RC is mounted when the card holder 510 is viewed from above may be referred to as a first position, and the position offset from the first position may be referred to as a second position. The second position may be any position as long as a part of the rewrite card RC can abut against the card holder 510.
具体而言，卡片装卸装置150使弯曲状态的重写卡RC在第二位置处从卡片支架510的正面侧与卡片支架510抵接之后，推入向卡片支架510侧。由此，在第二位置处，重写卡RC恢复为原始状态。然后，卡片装卸装置150通过使重写卡RC从第二位置向第一位置移动，从而将重写卡RC安装在卡片支架510上。Specifically, the card loading and unloading device 150 makes the bent rewrite card RC contact the card holder 510 from the front side of the card holder 510 at the second position, and then pushes it toward the card holder 510. Thus, the rewrite card RC is restored to its original state at the second position. Then, the card loading and unloading device 150 moves the rewrite card RC from the second position to the first position, thereby installing the rewrite card RC on the card holder 510.
换言之，重写卡RC是通过在第二位置处从卡片支架510的正面侧与卡片支架510抵接之后移动到第一位置，从而被安装于卡片支架510。In other words, the rewrite card RC is mounted on the card holder 510 by coming into contact with the card holder 510 from the front side of the card holder 510 at the second position and then moving to the first position.
考虑如此将重写卡RC安装于卡片支架510上，在外缘部561的上部壁561t中形成有切口部566。上部壁561t是重写卡RC与卡片支架510抵接一侧的侧壁。切口部566沿着上述变形方向Dt形成在上部壁561t的两侧(短边侧)。Considering that the rewrite card RC is mounted on the card holder 510 in this way, a cutout portion 566 is formed in the upper wall 561t of the outer edge portion 561. The upper wall 561t is a side wall on the side where the rewrite card RC abuts against the card holder 510. The cutout portion 566 is formed on both sides (short side) of the upper wall 561t along the deformation direction Dt.
通过在该两侧的位置处形成切口部566，能够使弯曲状态的重写卡RC的端部与底部562抵接。然后，重写卡RC被推入，并且该端部沿着上述变形方向Dt在底部562上移动，由此能够使该端部插入到形成于底部562与爪部564之间的间隙中。因此，能够可靠地将重写卡RC安装到卡片支架510上。By forming the cutouts 566 at the positions on both sides, the end of the rewrite card RC in a bent state can be brought into contact with the bottom 562. Then, the rewrite card RC is pushed in, and the end moves on the bottom 562 along the deformation direction Dt, thereby being inserted into the gap formed between the bottom 562 and the claw 564. Therefore, the rewrite card RC can be reliably mounted on the card holder 510.
另外，能够减小重写卡RC从第二位置向第一位置移动时的上部壁561t干扰的区域。因此，能够顺利地将重写卡RC引导至第一位置。In addition, the area that the upper wall 561t interferes with when the rewrite card RC moves from the second position to the first position can be reduced. Therefore, the rewrite card RC can be smoothly guided to the first position.
另外，在本实施方式中，在外缘部561的下部壁561b上也形成有切口部567。切口部567沿着上述变形方向Dt形成在下部壁561b的两侧。形成于上部壁561t及下部壁561b的一端侧的切口部566及567、和形成于上部壁561t及下部壁561b的另一端侧的切口部566及567，均处于沿着垂直于上述变形方向Dt的方向的直线上的区域中。该区域是：当重写卡RC从第二位置向第一位置移动时，引导部152和153分别将重写卡RC压向卡片支架510的同时进行移动的区域。因此，通过在上述一端侧和另一端侧上设置切口部566及567，能够降低当引导部152和153移动时，与上部壁561t和下部壁561b发生干扰的可能性。In addition, in this embodiment, a cutout 567 is also formed on the lower wall 561b of the outer edge portion 561. The cutout 567 is formed on both sides of the lower wall 561b along the deformation direction Dt. The cutouts 566 and 567 formed on one end side of the upper wall 561t and the lower wall 561b, and the cutouts 566 and 567 formed on the other end side of the upper wall 561t and the lower wall 561b are both located in a region on a straight line along a direction perpendicular to the deformation direction Dt. This region is a region where the guides 152 and 153 move while pressing the rewrite card RC toward the card holder 510 when the rewrite card RC moves from the second position to the first position. Therefore, by providing the cutouts 566 and 567 on the one end side and the other end side, the possibility of interference with the upper wall 561t and the lower wall 561b when the guides 152 and 153 move can be reduced.
另外，下部壁561b作为支撑重写卡RC的卡片支撑部发挥作用。因此，不仅可以通过后述的卡片支撑部565来支撑重写卡RC，而且还可以通过下部壁561b来支撑重写卡RC。因此，卡片支架510能够稳定地保持重写卡RC。In addition, the lower wall 561b functions as a card support portion for supporting the rewrite card RC. Therefore, the rewrite card RC can be supported not only by the card support portion 565 described later, but also by the lower wall 561b. Therefore, the card holder 510 can stably hold the rewrite card RC.
另外，虽然上部壁561t中形成有切口部566，但是也可以去除整个上部壁561t。In addition, although the cutout portion 566 is formed in the upper wall 561 t , the entire upper wall 561 t may be removed.
卡片支架510具备一对爪部564。与卡片支架500同样地，一对爪部564以沿着上述变形方向Dt突出的方式设置在卡片支架510上。但是，与卡片支架500的情况不同，一对爪部564沿着卡片支架510(外缘部561)的各短边延伸。各短边是形成上述区域(卡片安装部563)的四个边中的两个边。The card holder 510 has a pair of claws 564. Similar to the card holder 500, the pair of claws 564 are provided on the card holder 510 in a manner protruding along the deformation direction Dt. However, unlike the card holder 500, the pair of claws 564 extend along the short sides of the card holder 510 (outer edge 561). The short sides are two of the four sides forming the above-mentioned area (card mounting portion 563).
在一对爪部564各自的、与重写卡RC抵接卡片支架510的一侧相反侧的端部(第一端部)上，设置有用于支撑被安装在卡片支架510上的重写卡RC的卡片支撑部565。由此，从第二位置移动到第一位置的重写卡RC被卡片支撑部565所支撑。因此，能够降低重写卡RC超过第一位置移动的可能性。在本实施方式中，卡片支撑部565设置在下部壁561b的两端。因此，能够降低掉落至卡片支架510下方(图23所示的－z轴方向)的可能性。A card support portion 565 for supporting the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510 is provided at each end (first end) of a pair of claws 564 on the opposite side to the side where the rewrite card RC abuts against the card holder 510. Thus, the rewrite card RC moving from the second position to the first position is supported by the card support portion 565. Therefore, the possibility of the rewrite card RC moving beyond the first position can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the card support portion 565 is provided at both ends of the lower wall 561b. Therefore, the possibility of falling below the card holder 510 (in the -z axis direction shown in FIG. 23) can be reduced.
另外，一对爪部564各自的、重写卡RC与卡片支架510抵接侧的端部(第二端部)上，也可以形成有切口部564a。通过设置切口部564a，能够降低使重写卡RC从卡片支架510的正面移动到第二位置时，重写卡RC与爪部564发生干扰的可能性。In addition, a notch 564a may be formed at each end (second end) of the pair of claws 564 on the side where the rewrite card RC contacts the card holder 510. By providing the notch 564a, the possibility of interference between the rewrite card RC and the claws 564 when the rewrite card RC is moved from the front of the card holder 510 to the second position can be reduced.
切口部564a的爪部564延伸方向上的长度越长，越能够使第二位置接近第一位置。即，能够在靠近第一位置的位置处，使重写卡RC与卡片支架510抵接。因此，能够减小引导部152、153在图23所示的z轴方向上的移动量。但是，由于切口部564a的上述长度越长，爪部564的该方向上的长度越发变短，因此爪部564对重写卡RC的保持可能变得不稳定。考虑到这一点而对切口部564a的上述长度进行限定。切口部564a并不一定必须要形成。The longer the length of the claw 564 of the cutout 564a in the extending direction is, the closer the second position can be to the first position. That is, the rewrite card RC can be brought into contact with the card holder 510 at a position close to the first position. Therefore, the movement amount of the guides 152 and 153 in the z-axis direction shown in FIG. 23 can be reduced. However, since the longer the length of the cutout 564a is, the shorter the length of the claw 564 in this direction becomes, the claw 564 may become unstable in holding the rewrite card RC. The length of the cutout 564a is limited in consideration of this point. The cutout 564a does not necessarily have to be formed.
[卡片装卸装置的动作例][Operation example of card loading and unloading device]
图23中的23001～23004是表示将重写卡RC安装于卡片支架510时的动作例的图。23001 to 23004 in FIG. 23 are diagrams showing an example of operation when the rewrite card RC is mounted on the card holder 510 .
在本实施方式的卡片装卸装置150中，Z轴电动机173(参照图5)使被卡片吸附部151吸附并被引导部152、153等(弯曲机构)弯曲的重写卡RC，在上述第二位置处与卡片支架510抵接。然后，θ轴电动机174(参照图5)作为使重写卡RC从上述第二位置向上述第一位置移动的卡片移动部发挥作用。In the card loading and unloading device 150 of the present embodiment, the Z-axis motor 173 (see FIG. 5 ) causes the rewrite card RC, which is adsorbed by the card adsorption unit 151 and bent by the guide units 152, 153, etc. (bending mechanism), to abut against the card holder 510 at the second position. Then, the θ-axis motor 174 (see FIG. 5 ) functions as a card moving unit that moves the rewrite card RC from the second position to the first position.
作为图23所示的动作例的前提，卡片吸附部151通过吸附被引导部152、153等(弯曲机构)弯曲的状态的重写卡RC，而将其加以保持。另外，在卡片装卸装置150从卡片载置部210拔除了重写卡RC之后，通过由θ轴电动机174进行的旋转，变为卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153与卡片支架510相对的状态。As a premise of the operation example shown in FIG23, the card adsorption unit 151 holds the rewrite card RC in a state bent by the guides 152, 153 (bending mechanism) by adsorbing it. In addition, after the card loading and unloading device 150 removes the rewrite card RC from the card loading unit 210, the card adsorption unit 151 and the guides 152, 153 are rotated by the θ-axis motor 174 to a state where the card adsorption unit 151 and the guides 152, 153 are opposite to the card holder 510.
在该状态下，θ轴电动机174使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153旋转规定角度，以使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153向图23的23001中所示的箭头方向(上方)移动。In this state, the θ-axis motor 174 rotates the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 by a predetermined angle to move the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 in the direction of the arrows (upward) indicated by 23001 in FIG. 23 .
如上所述，卡片支架510设置成相对于托盘610的侧面倾斜。通过该旋转，能够使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153以与相对于托盘610的侧面倾斜地设置的卡片支架510大致平行的方式移动。另外，能够以在第二位置Po12(相对于卡片支架510向其上方偏移的位置)处，重写卡RC与卡片支架510的一部分抵接的方式，使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153移动。上述规定角度只要是能够实现如上的卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153的移动这一程度的大小即可。As described above, the card holder 510 is set to be inclined relative to the side of the tray 610. Through this rotation, the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 can be moved in a manner substantially parallel to the card holder 510 that is set to be inclined relative to the side of the tray 610. In addition, the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 can be moved in a manner that the rewrite card RC abuts against a part of the card holder 510 at the second position Po12 (a position offset upward relative to the card holder 510). The above-mentioned specified angle can be any size as long as it can achieve the above-mentioned movement of the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153.
然后，如图23中的23002所示，Z轴电动机173通过使支撑部161沿上述第一方向移动，从而使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153向卡片支架510移动。由此，Z轴电动机173使重写卡RC在设置有切口部566侧的第二位置Po12处与卡片支架510抵接。即，Z轴电动机173是在重写卡RC的一部分从卡片支架510突出的状态下，使重写卡RC与卡片支架510抵接。Then, as shown at 23002 in FIG. 23 , the Z-axis motor 173 moves the support portion 161 in the first direction, thereby moving the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 toward the card holder 510. Thus, the Z-axis motor 173 brings the rewrite card RC into contact with the card holder 510 at the second position Po12 on the side where the cutout portion 566 is provided. That is, the Z-axis motor 173 brings the rewrite card RC into contact with the card holder 510 while a portion of the rewrite card RC protrudes from the card holder 510.
然后，电磁阀控制部430使电磁阀172断开(OFF)，由此重写卡RC被从卡片吸附部151释放。在该状态下，如图23中的23003所示，Z轴电动机173通过使支撑部161沿上述第一方向移动，从而使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153进一步向卡片支架510移动。通过将重写卡RC推入卡片支架510中，弯曲的重写卡RC恢复为原始状态，重写卡RC的一部分被插入到形成于底部562与爪部564之间的间隙中。Then, the solenoid valve control unit 430 turns off the solenoid valve 172, thereby releasing the rewrite card RC from the card adsorption unit 151. In this state, as shown in 23003 in FIG. 23, the Z-axis motor 173 moves the support unit 161 in the first direction, thereby further moving the card adsorption unit 151 and the guide units 152 and 153 toward the card holder 510. By pushing the rewrite card RC into the card holder 510, the bent rewrite card RC returns to its original state, and a portion of the rewrite card RC is inserted into the gap formed between the bottom 562 and the claw 564.
然后，如图23中的23004所示，Z轴电动机173使支撑部161向上述第二方向移动，以在保持着引导部152、153与重写卡RC抵接的状态不变的情况下，将卡片吸附部151拉入卡片装卸装置150的内部。在该状态下，θ轴电动机174使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153旋转规定角度，以使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153向图23的23004中所示的箭头方向(下方)移动。即，θ轴电动机174使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153向与在图23的23001中移动的方向相反的方向移动。由此，卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153移动到朝向水平方向(y轴方向)的位置。Then, as shown in 23004 in FIG. 23 , the Z-axis motor 173 moves the support portion 161 in the second direction to pull the card adsorption portion 151 into the card loading and unloading device 150 while the guide portions 152 and 153 are in contact with the rewrite card RC. In this state, the θ-axis motor 174 rotates the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 by a predetermined angle to move the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 in the arrow direction (downward) shown in 23004 in FIG. 23 . That is, the θ-axis motor 174 moves the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 in the direction opposite to the direction in 23001 in FIG. 23 . As a result, the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153 move to a position facing the horizontal direction (y-axis direction).
在图23的23004的状态下，引导部152、153与重写卡RC抵接。通过使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153向下方移动，引导部152、153通过摩擦力使抵接的重写卡RC向第一位置Po11的方向移动。因此，如图23中的23005所示，能够将重写卡RC安装在第一位置Po11(卡片安装部563、即正常的安装位置)处。上述规定角度也可以说是被规定为能够使重写卡RC从第二位置Po12移动到第一位置Po11的角度。In the state of 23004 in FIG. 23 , the guides 152 and 153 are in contact with the rewrite card RC. By moving the card adsorption portion 151 and the guides 152 and 153 downward, the guides 152 and 153 move the in contact rewrite card RC toward the first position Po11 by friction. Therefore, as shown in 23005 in FIG. 23 , the rewrite card RC can be installed at the first position Po11 (card installation portion 563, i.e., the normal installation position). The above-mentioned specified angle can also be said to be specified as an angle that enables the rewrite card RC to move from the second position Po12 to the first position Po11.
如此，Z轴电动机173和θ轴电动机174使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153移动，由此能够相对于卡片支架510安装重写卡RC。因此，卡片装卸装置150不仅能够相对于卡片支架500安装重写卡RC，也能够相对于卡片支架510安装重写卡RC。即，卡片装卸装置150仅通过变更其动作，便能够通用于重写卡RC相对于卡片支架500和卡片支架510的安装中。In this way, the Z-axis motor 173 and the θ-axis motor 174 move the card adsorption portion 151 and the guide portions 152 and 153, thereby enabling the rewrite card RC to be installed relative to the card holder 510. Therefore, the card loading and unloading device 150 can not only install the rewrite card RC relative to the card holder 500, but also install the rewrite card RC relative to the card holder 510. That is, the card loading and unloading device 150 can be used in both installation of the rewrite card RC relative to the card holder 500 and the card holder 510 by simply changing its operation.
另外，关于重写卡RC从卡片支架510中的拔除，可以以与图23所示的动作顺序相反的顺序进行，也可以与实施方式一同样地进行。另外，重写卡RC相对于卡片载置部210的安装和拔除，也可以与实施方式一相同。然而，在卡片载置部210为与卡片支架510相同的形状时，重写卡RC相对于卡片载置部210的安装和拔除，也可以按照图23的动作顺序或与其相反的顺序进行。In addition, the removal of the rewrite card RC from the card holder 510 may be performed in the reverse order of the action sequence shown in FIG. 23 or in the same manner as in Embodiment 1. In addition, the installation and removal of the rewrite card RC relative to the card loading section 210 may also be the same as in Embodiment 1. However, when the card loading section 210 is the same shape as the card holder 510, the installation and removal of the rewrite card RC relative to the card loading section 210 may also be performed in the reverse order of the action sequence shown in FIG. 23 or in the reverse order thereof.
另外，上述卡片移动部也可以由与Z轴电动机173不同的部件实现。即，为了实现重写卡RC在第一位置Po11和第二位置Po12之间的移动，也可以设置使卡片吸附部151以及引导部152、153移动的机构(例如：升降机构)来作为上述卡片移动部。In addition, the card moving part may be realized by a component different from the Z-axis motor 173. That is, in order to realize the movement of the rewrite card RC between the first position Po11 and the second position Po12, a mechanism (e.g., a lifting mechanism) for moving the card adsorption part 151 and the guide parts 152 and 153 may be provided as the card moving part.
[实施方式三][Implementation Method 3]
在实施方式三的发药系统1A中，作为用于输送药剂的托盘，可使用托盘610或620来代替托盘600。另外，在发药系统1A中，可使用卡片支架510A来代替卡片支架510。In the medicine dispensing system 1A of the third embodiment, as a tray for conveying medicines, the tray 610 or 620 may be used instead of the tray 600. In addition, in the medicine dispensing system 1A, the card holder 510A may be used instead of the card holder 510.
首先，对托盘610和620的一例以及保持卡片支架510A并安装在托盘610或620上的支架保持部件700的一例进行说明。First, an example of the trays 610 and 620 and an example of the holder holding member 700 that holds the card holder 510A and is attached to the tray 610 or 620 will be described.
〔托盘〕〔tray〕
图24是表示托盘610和620的结构例的立体图。图24的24001表示托盘610的结构例，24002表示托盘620的结构例。FIG24 is a perspective view showing a configuration example of trays 610 and 620. Reference numeral 24001 in FIG24 shows a configuration example of tray 610, and reference numeral 24002 shows a configuration example of tray 620.
如图24中的24001所示，托盘610具备边缘部611、第一突出部612以及第二突出部613。托盘610是与图21所示的托盘610相同的部件。As shown in 24001 in Fig. 24 , the tray 610 includes an edge portion 611, a first protrusion 612, and a second protrusion 613. The tray 610 is the same component as the tray 610 shown in Fig. 21 .
边缘部611是限定托盘610的开口部的边缘部中的短边部分，并且是保持支架保持部件700的部分。边缘部611在垂直方向上具有厚度。将边缘部611的长边方向上的长度记载为L1。The edge portion 611 is a short side portion of the edge portion defining the opening portion of the tray 610 and is a portion that holds the rack holding member 700. The edge portion 611 has a thickness in the vertical direction. The length of the edge portion 611 in the long side direction is represented as L1.
第一突出部612和第二突出部613从边缘部611向垂直方向突出，并且是限制支架保持部件700的长度方向上的移动的部分。第一突出部612和第二突出部613是分别连接于边缘部611两端的部分，并且限定托盘610的拐角部。The first protrusion 612 and the second protrusion 613 protrude vertically from the edge 611 and restrict the longitudinal movement of the rack holding member 700. The first protrusion 612 and the second protrusion 613 are connected to both ends of the edge 611 and define the corners of the tray 610.
如图24中的24002所示，托盘620具备边缘部621、第三突出部622以及第四突出部623。托盘620的高度比托盘610的高度高。在本实施方式中，将托盘620的高度规定为托盘610高度的大约两倍。通过将托盘620的高度规定为托盘610高度的整数倍，能够将托盘620保管于后述的保管托盘610用的托盘保管架60A(参照图28)中。As shown in 24002 in FIG. 24 , the tray 620 includes an edge portion 621, a third protrusion 622, and a fourth protrusion 623. The height of the tray 620 is higher than the height of the tray 610. In the present embodiment, the height of the tray 620 is set to be approximately twice the height of the tray 610. By setting the height of the tray 620 to be an integral multiple of the height of the tray 610, the tray 620 can be stored in a tray storage rack 60A (see FIG. 28 ) for storing the tray 610 described later.
边缘部621是限定托盘610的开口部的边缘部中的短边部分，并且是保持支架保持部件700的部分。边缘部621在垂直方向上具有厚度。边缘部611和边缘部621的厚度大致相同。将边缘部621的长度方向上的长度记载为L2。长度L2比长度L1短。The edge portion 621 is a short side portion of the edge portion defining the opening portion of the tray 610, and is a portion that holds the rack holding member 700. The edge portion 621 has a thickness in the vertical direction. The thickness of the edge portion 611 and the edge portion 621 are substantially the same. The length of the edge portion 621 in the longitudinal direction is recorded as L2. The length L2 is shorter than the length L1.
第三突出部622和第四突出部623从边缘部621向垂直方向突出，并且是限制支架保持部件700的长度方向上的移动的部分。第三突出部622和第四突出部623分别是连接于边缘部621两端的部分，并且限定了托盘620的拐角部。The third protrusion 622 and the fourth protrusion 623 protrude vertically from the edge 621 and restrict the longitudinal movement of the rack holding member 700. The third protrusion 622 and the fourth protrusion 623 are connected to both ends of the edge 621 and define the corners of the tray 620.
[支架保持部件][Stand holding component]
图25是表示将支架保持部件700安装在托盘610上的状态的图。图25中的25001是将支架保持部件700安装在托盘610上的状态的主视图。图25中的25002是将支架保持部件700安装在托盘610上的状态的俯视图。Fig. 25 is a diagram showing a state where the rack holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 610. Reference numeral 25001 in Fig. 25 is a front view showing a state where the rack holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 610. Reference numeral 25002 in Fig. 25 is a top view showing a state where the rack holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 610.
支架保持部件700是保持卡片支架510A的部件。在托盘610或620被输送到卡片信息变更单元100(参照图27)时，支架保持部件700将卡片支架510A保持在与卡片信息变更单元100的卡片装卸装置150(参照图27)相对的位置处。换言之，支架保持部件700将卡片支架510A保持在下述位置：即，能够将安装于卡片支架510A的重写卡RC取出并且将取出的重写卡RC安装于卡片支架510A的位置。The holder holding member 700 is a member for holding the card holder 510A. When the tray 610 or 620 is conveyed to the card information change unit 100 (see FIG. 27 ), the holder holding member 700 holds the card holder 510A at a position opposite to the card loading and unloading device 150 (see FIG. 27 ) of the card information change unit 100. In other words, the holder holding member 700 holds the card holder 510A at a position where the rewrite card RC mounted in the card holder 510A can be removed and the removed rewrite card RC can be mounted in the card holder 510A.
在支架保持部件700被安装于托盘610或620时，与实施方式二的卡片支架510同样地，相对于托盘610或620设置卡片支架510A。即，卡片支架510A被支架保持部件700保持成：以从托盘610的底部朝向上部而从托盘610的侧面远离的方式，相对于托盘610的侧面倾斜。When the holder holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 610 or 620, the card holder 510A is provided relative to the tray 610 or 620, similarly to the card holder 510 of the second embodiment. That is, the card holder 510A is held by the holder holding member 700 so as to be inclined relative to the side of the tray 610 in a manner that it moves from the bottom of the tray 610 toward the upper part and away from the side of the tray 610.
另外，卡片支架510A除了具备后述的突起部571之外，其他构成(例如：大小和形状)与卡片支架510相同。另外，在本实施方式中，说明的是支架保持部件700和卡片支架510A为独立部件的情况，但它们也可以一体地成形。In addition, the card holder 510A has the same configuration (eg, size and shape) as the card holder 510 except for the protrusion 571 described later. In addition, in the present embodiment, the holder holding member 700 and the card holder 510A are described as separate components, but they may be integrally formed.
支架保持部件700具备：保持卡片支架510A的基部701、以及设置于基部701一端的突起702。The holder holding member 700 includes a base 701 that holds the card holder 510A, and a protrusion 702 provided at one end of the base 701 .
基部701具备顶面部703、底面部705、以及侧面部704，其中，侧面部704与顶面部703和底面部705连接并保持卡片支架510A。通过顶面部703、侧面部704及底面部705，基部701的截面形状被限定为C字形截面，该C字形截面形成沿图25的25001的纸面进深方向开口的开口部。该截面是以包括顶面部703、侧面部704及底面部705的各垂直线的平面切断时的截面。另外，基部701的开口部的高度与边缘部611、621的厚度大致相同。由此，能够使边缘部611、621与基部701嵌合，并且，能够降低基部701在垂直方向上移动的可能性。因此，能够降低卡片支架510A在垂直方向上移动的可能性。The base 701 includes a top face portion 703, a bottom face portion 705, and a side face portion 704, wherein the side face portion 704 is connected to the top face portion 703 and the bottom face portion 705 and holds the card holder 510A. The cross-sectional shape of the base 701 is limited to a C-shaped cross-section by the top face portion 703, the side face portion 704, and the bottom face portion 705, and the C-shaped cross-section forms an opening portion that opens in the paper depth direction of 25001 of FIG. 25. The cross-section is a cross-section when the plane including each vertical line of the top face portion 703, the side face portion 704, and the bottom face portion 705 is cut. In addition, the height of the opening portion of the base 701 is substantially the same as the thickness of the edge portions 611 and 621. Thus, the edge portions 611 and 621 can be fitted with the base 701, and the possibility of the base 701 moving in the vertical direction can be reduced. Therefore, the possibility of the card holder 510A moving in the vertical direction can be reduced.
突起部702设置在基部701的一端，并且是用于调节支架保持部件700的长度方向上的长度的部分。突起部702被设置为能够利用例如钳子等切断。当将包括突起部702的支架保持部件700的长度方向上的长度设为L3时，长度L3与边缘部611的长度方向上的长度L1大致相同。The protrusion 702 is provided at one end of the base 701 and is a portion for adjusting the length in the longitudinal direction of the stent holding member 700. The protrusion 702 is provided so as to be cut by, for example, pliers, etc. When the length in the longitudinal direction of the stent holding member 700 including the protrusion 702 is set to L3, the length L3 is substantially the same as the length L1 in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion 611.
因此，如图25所示，在将基部701安装于边缘部611时，突起部702与第一突出部612接触，并且，基部701的与突起部702相反侧的端部与第二突出部613接触。因此，通过第一突出部612和第二突出部613，能够降低支架保持部件700在长度方向上移动的可能性，因此，能够降低卡片支架510A在长度方向上移动的可能性。Therefore, as shown in Fig. 25, when the base 701 is mounted on the edge portion 611, the protrusion 702 contacts the first protrusion 612, and the end of the base 701 opposite to the protrusion 702 contacts the second protrusion 613. Therefore, the possibility of the holder holding member 700 moving in the length direction can be reduced by the first protrusion 612 and the second protrusion 613, and thus the possibility of the card holder 510A moving in the length direction can be reduced.
图26是表示将支架保持部件700安装在托盘620上的状态的图。图26的26001是将支架保持部件700安装在托盘620上的状态的主视图。图26的26002是将支架保持部件700安装在托盘620上的状态的俯视图。Fig. 26 is a diagram showing a state where the rack holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 620. 26001 in Fig. 26 is a front view showing a state where the rack holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 620. 26002 in Fig. 26 is a top view showing a state where the rack holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 620.
如上所述，突起部702可切断。如图25和图26所示，切断了突起部702时的支架保持部件700的长度方向的长度(即，基部701的长度方向的长度L4)，与边缘部621的长度方向的长度L2大致相同。As described above, the protrusion 702 can be cut off. As shown in Figures 25 and 26, the length of the bracket holding member 700 in the longitudinal direction when the protrusion 702 is cut off (i.e., the length L4 of the base 701 in the longitudinal direction) is substantially the same as the length L2 of the edge 621 in the longitudinal direction.
因此，在将支架保持部件700安装于托盘620时，用户将突起部702切断。由此，如图26所示，当基部701安装到边缘部621时，设置有突起部702的端部与第三突出部622接触，并且，基部701的与设置有突起部702的端部相反侧的端部与第四突出部623接触。因此，与将支架保持部件700安装到托盘610的情况同样地，通过第三突出部622和第四突出部623能够降低支架保持部件700在长度方向上移动的可能性，因此，能够降低卡片支架510A在长度方向上移动的可能性。Therefore, when the holder holding member 700 is mounted on the tray 620, the user cuts off the protrusion 702. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26 , when the base 701 is mounted on the edge portion 621, the end portion provided with the protrusion 702 contacts the third protrusion 622, and the end portion of the base 701 opposite to the end portion provided with the protrusion 702 contacts the fourth protrusion 623. Therefore, similar to the case of mounting the holder holding member 700 on the tray 610, the possibility of the holder holding member 700 moving in the length direction can be reduced by the third protrusion 622 and the fourth protrusion 623, and thus the possibility of the card holder 510A moving in the length direction can be reduced.
如此，通过在支架保持部件700的一端设置可切断的突起部702，从而能够将支架保持部件700呈可插拔地分别固定在长度方向的长度不同且作为支架保持部件700的安装位置的边缘部611和边缘部621上。In this way, by providing a cuttable protrusion 702 at one end of the bracket holding component 700, the bracket holding component 700 can be pluggably fixed to the edge portion 611 and the edge portion 621 which have different lengths in the longitudinal direction and serve as the installation position of the bracket holding component 700.
[卡片支架][Card holder]
如图25和图26所示，在卡片支架510A的上部壁561t的底面部上设置有突起部571。突起部571具有下述功能：即，当安装在卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC朝向上部壁561t侧移动了时，使重写卡RC的移动停止的功能。As shown in Fig. 25 and Fig. 26, the bottom surface of the upper wall 561t of the card holder 510A is provided with a protrusion 571. The protrusion 571 has the function of stopping the movement of the rewrite card RC when the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A moves toward the upper wall 561t.
如在实施方式二中使用图23所说明，重写卡RC在被安装于卡片支架510A时，被从上部壁561t侧的第二位置Po 12向卡片支架510A的卡片安装部563(参照图22)的位置(第一位置Po 11)插入。为了能够顺利地进行该插入，在卡片支架510A上设置有切口部566。但是，由于设置切口部566，安装在卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC容易从卡片支架510A上脱落。通过设置突起部571，能够使重写卡RC难以从卡片支架510A上脱落，从而能够降低重写卡RC掉落的可能性。As described in the second embodiment using FIG. 23 , when the rewrite card RC is installed in the card holder 510A, it is inserted from the second position Po 12 on the upper wall 561t side to the position (first position Po 11) of the card installation portion 563 (refer to FIG. 22 ) of the card holder 510A. In order to smoothly perform the insertion, a cutout portion 566 is provided on the card holder 510A. However, due to the provision of the cutout portion 566, the rewrite card RC installed on the card holder 510A is easy to fall off from the card holder 510A. By providing the protrusion 571, it is possible to make it difficult for the rewrite card RC to fall off from the card holder 510A, thereby reducing the possibility of the rewrite card RC falling off.
另外，突起部571只要从上部壁561t的底面部突出下述程度即可，即，在卡片装卸装置150拔除重写卡RC时，重写卡RC不会发生不可逆的变形这一程度。The protrusion 571 only needs to protrude from the bottom surface of the upper wall 561 t to such an extent that the rewrite card RC does not undergo irreversible deformation when the rewrite card RC is removed by the card insertion and removal device 150 .
[托盘发出装置的整体构成][Overall structure of the tray dispensing device]
对本实施方式的托盘发出装置50A的整体构成进行说明。图27中的27001是表示托盘发出装置50A的概略构成的一例的立体图。本实施方式的发药系统1A与发药系统1的不同点在于：代替图1所示的发药系统1的托盘发出装置50而设有托盘发出装置50A。代替托盘600或在托盘600的基础上，发药系统1A执行对托盘610或620的药剂发出。即，托盘发出装置50A主要执行托盘610或620的发出，但是也能够执行托盘600的发出。以下，作为其一例，说明发药系统1A处理托盘610的情况。The overall structure of the tray dispensing device 50A of the present embodiment is described. 27001 in FIG. 27 is a three-dimensional diagram showing an example of the schematic structure of the tray dispensing device 50A. The medicine dispensing system 1A of the present embodiment is different from the medicine dispensing system 1 in that a tray dispensing device 50A is provided instead of the tray dispensing device 50 of the medicine dispensing system 1 shown in FIG. 1. The medicine dispensing system 1A performs medicine dispensing to the tray 610 or 620 instead of the tray 600 or on the basis of the tray 600. That is, the tray dispensing device 50A mainly performs the dispensing of the tray 610 or 620, but can also perform the dispensing of the tray 600. As an example, the following describes the case where the medicine dispensing system 1A handles the tray 610.
在实施方式一的托盘发出装置50中，如图11所示，卡片信息变更单元100被安装在插入口53侧(即，安装托盘保管架60的一侧，且是托盘发出装置50的跟前侧。)。在本实施方式的托盘发出装置50A中，如图27中的27001所示，卡片信息变更单元100隔着托盘输送机构80安装在与插入口53相反的一侧(即，托盘发出装置50A的内侧)。In the tray issuing device 50 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG11 , the card information changing unit 100 is installed on the side of the insertion port 53 (i.e., the side where the tray storage rack 60 is installed and the front side of the tray issuing device 50). In the tray issuing device 50A of the present embodiment, as shown in 27001 in FIG27 , the card information changing unit 100 is installed on the side opposite to the insertion port 53 (i.e., the inner side of the tray issuing device 50A) across the tray conveying mechanism 80.
如图28所示，本实施方式的托盘保管架60A设置有多个用于保管托盘610的保管位置。图28的28001是表示托盘保管架60A的一例的主视图，28002是表示托盘保管架60A的一例的侧视图。As shown in Fig. 28, a tray storage rack 60A of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of storage positions for storing a tray 610. Reference numeral 28001 in Fig. 28 is a front view showing an example of the tray storage rack 60A, and reference numeral 28002 is a side view showing an example of the tray storage rack 60A.
在托盘保管架60A中，根据托盘610、620的形状(尤其是高度)而规定各保管位置的形状。在多个保管位置的各个中保管托盘610。如上所述，托盘620的高度被规定为托盘610高度的大约两倍。因此，托盘保管架60A能够在其高度方向(z轴方向)上于两层的保管位置保管一个托盘620。In the tray storage rack 60A, the shape of each storage position is determined according to the shape (especially the height) of the trays 610 and 620. The tray 610 is stored in each of the plurality of storage positions. As described above, the height of the tray 620 is determined to be approximately twice the height of the tray 610. Therefore, the tray storage rack 60A can store one tray 620 in two storage positions in the height direction (z-axis direction).
实施方式一的托盘保管架60能够在各保管位置的两侧进行托盘600的插入或拔出。即，托盘保管架60中设置有两个可进行托盘600的插入或拔出的开口部，在图14中，既可以从跟前侧朝向纸面侧，也可以从内侧朝向纸面侧进行托盘600的插入或拔出。另一方面，如图28所示，与托盘保管架60不同，托盘保管架60A仅具有一个可进行托盘610的插入或拔出的开口部61A。即，在托盘保管架60A中设置有与侧壁62A连接的背面壁63A。The pallet storage rack 60 of the first embodiment can insert or remove the pallet 600 on both sides of each storage position. That is, the pallet storage rack 60 is provided with two openings for inserting or removing the pallet 600, and in FIG. 14 , the pallet 600 can be inserted or removed from the front side toward the paper surface side or from the inside toward the paper surface side. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 , unlike the pallet storage rack 60, the pallet storage rack 60A has only one opening 61A for inserting or removing the pallet 610. That is, the pallet storage rack 60A is provided with a back wall 63A connected to the side wall 62A.
为了在托盘保管架60A中保管有托盘610的状态下，用户能够目视确认卡片支架510A，托盘610被要求以卡片支架510A朝向开口部61A侧的方式保管在托盘保管架60A中。因此，托盘610被要求以卡片支架510A朝向托盘发出装置50A侧的方式(即，朝向托盘发出装置50A的内侧的方式)，从托盘发出装置50A向托盘保管架60A输送。为了满足该要求，在托盘发出装置50A中，用于对安装在卡片支架510A中的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更的卡片信息变更单元100被设置在托盘发出装置50A的内侧。In order to allow the user to visually check the card holder 510A when the tray 610 is stored in the tray storage rack 60A, the tray 610 is required to be stored in the tray storage rack 60A with the card holder 510A facing the opening 61A side. Therefore, the tray 610 is required to be transported from the tray delivery device 50A to the tray storage rack 60A with the card holder 510A facing the tray delivery device 50A side (that is, facing the inside of the tray delivery device 50A). In order to meet this requirement, in the tray delivery device 50A, a card information changing unit 100 for changing the display information of the rewrite card RC installed in the card holder 510A is provided inside the tray delivery device 50A.
如图27中的27002所示，作为托盘输送机构80，在托盘发出装置50A的底部设有第一托盘输送机构80A、第二托盘输送机构80B、以及第三托盘输送机构80C。图27中的27002是模式化表示托盘发出装置50A底部的一例的俯视图。分别将第一托盘输送机构80A设置在第一停止位置Po21，第二托盘输送机构80B设置在第二停止位置Po22，第三托盘输送机构80C设置在第三停止位置Po23。As shown in 27002 in FIG. 27 , as the pallet conveying mechanism 80, a first pallet conveying mechanism 80A, a second pallet conveying mechanism 80B, and a third pallet conveying mechanism 80C are provided at the bottom of the pallet sending device 50A. 27002 in FIG. 27 is a top view schematically showing an example of the bottom of the pallet sending device 50A. The first pallet conveying mechanism 80A is set at the first stop position Po21, the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B is set at the second stop position Po22, and the third pallet conveying mechanism 80C is set at the third stop position Po23.
托盘610被从图中的箭头方向输送向托盘发出装置50A。即，第一停止位置Po21是托盘610停止在与托盘发出装置50A相邻的上游侧的注射单打印装置40处(参照图1)的位置。第二停止位置Po22是被从第一停止位置Po21输送的托盘610停止的位置，并且是与卡片信息变更单元100的卡片装卸装置150相对的位置。在第二停止位置Po22执行由卡片装卸装置150实施的重写卡RC的拔插。第三停止位置Po23是被从第二停止位置Po22输送的托盘610停止的位置。升降装置300将被输送至第三停止位置Po23的托盘610向插入于插入口53中的托盘保管架60A输送。The tray 610 is transported to the tray dispensing device 50A from the direction of the arrow in the figure. That is, the first stop position Po21 is a position where the tray 610 stops at the injection slip printing device 40 (refer to FIG. 1 ) on the upstream side adjacent to the tray dispensing device 50A. The second stop position Po22 is a position where the tray 610 transported from the first stop position Po21 stops, and is a position opposite to the card loading and unloading device 150 of the card information changing unit 100. The rewrite card RC is removed and inserted by the card loading and unloading device 150 at the second stop position Po22. The third stop position Po23 is a position where the tray 610 transported from the second stop position Po22 stops. The lifting device 300 transports the tray 610 transported to the third stop position Po23 to the tray storage rack 60A inserted into the insertion port 53.
第一托盘输送机构80A、第二托盘输送机构80B以及第三托盘输送机构80C分别被控制装置400(参照图4)独立地控制。控制装置400可以是不仅控制托盘发出装置50A，而且控制构成发药系统1A的各装置或机构的装置。The first tray conveying mechanism 80A, the second tray conveying mechanism 80B, and the third tray conveying mechanism 80C are independently controlled by the control device 400 (see FIG. 4 ). The control device 400 may control not only the tray dispensing device 50A but also each device or mechanism constituting the medicine dispensing system 1A.
另外，在托盘发出装置50A的底部设置有改变托盘610的朝向的旋转机构54。作为旋转机构54，第一旋转机构54A设置在第一停止位置Po21处，第二旋转机构54B设置在第三停止位置Po23处。控制装置400将第一旋转机构54A和第二旋转机构54B分别独立地进行控制。为了在使托盘610旋转时，托盘610不与托盘输送机构80碰撞，旋转机构54是将托盘610抬起后使其旋转。In addition, a rotating mechanism 54 for changing the orientation of the tray 610 is provided at the bottom of the tray dispensing device 50A. As the rotating mechanism 54, the first rotating mechanism 54A is provided at the first stop position Po21, and the second rotating mechanism 54B is provided at the third stop position Po23. The control device 400 controls the first rotating mechanism 54A and the second rotating mechanism 54B independently. In order to prevent the tray 610 from colliding with the tray conveying mechanism 80 when rotating the tray 610, the rotating mechanism 54 lifts the tray 610 and then rotates it.
托盘610被从托盘610的短边侧(具体是安装有卡片支架510A的一侧)朝向托盘发出装置50A输送。控制装置400对第一旋转机构54A进行控制，将在第一停止位置Po21处停止的托盘610的朝向进行变更，使得在第二停止位置Po22处，卡片支架510A朝向卡片信息变更单元100的方向。The tray 610 is transported toward the tray dispensing device 50A from the short side of the tray 610 (specifically, the side where the card holder 510A is installed). The control device 400 controls the first rotating mechanism 54A to change the orientation of the tray 610 stopped at the first stop position Po21 so that the card holder 510A faces the direction of the card information changing unit 100 at the second stop position Po22.
升降装置300以托盘610被保管于托盘保管架60A中时卡片支架510A为开口部61A侧的方式，将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A。因此，升降装置300是在维持着于第一停止位置Po21处变更后的托盘610的朝向不变的情况下，将托盘610从第三停止位置Po23输送到托盘保管架60A。即，升降装置300是在第三停止位置Po23处不变更托盘610的朝向的情况下，将托盘610从第三停止位置Po23输送到托盘保管架60A。The lifting device 300 conveys the tray 610 to the tray storage rack 60A so that the card holder 510A is on the opening 61A side when the tray 610 is stored in the tray storage rack 60A. Therefore, the lifting device 300 conveys the tray 610 from the third stop position Po23 to the tray storage rack 60A while maintaining the orientation of the tray 610 changed at the first stop position Po21. That is, the lifting device 300 conveys the tray 610 from the third stop position Po23 to the tray storage rack 60A without changing the orientation of the tray 610 at the third stop position Po23.
但是，例如在将托盘600输送到托盘保管架60时，升降装置300也可以以卡片支架500朝向托盘发出装置50A的前方(托盘发出装置50A的跟前侧、图27所示的+y轴方向)的方式输送托盘600。该情况下，用户在托盘保管架60被插入于插入口53的状态下，能够确认被安装在卡片支架500上的重写卡RC的显示信息。However, for example, when conveying the tray 600 to the tray storage rack 60, the lifting device 300 may convey the tray 600 in such a manner that the card holder 500 faces the front of the tray delivery device 50A (the front side of the tray delivery device 50A, the +y axis direction shown in FIG. 27). In this case, the user can check the display information of the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 500 while the tray storage rack 60 is inserted into the insertion port 53.
如此，当升降装置300以卡片支架500朝向托盘发出装置50A的前方的方式输送托盘600时，控制装置400通过使第二旋转机构54B旋转而将托盘600的朝向变更180度。即，第二旋转机构54B将在第二停止位置Po22处变更了重写卡RC的显示信息之后的托盘600的朝向，变更为卡片支架500(即，重写卡RC)朝向托盘发出装置50A的前方。In this way, when the lifting device 300 conveys the tray 600 in such a manner that the card holder 500 faces the front of the tray discharging device 50A, the control device 400 rotates the second rotating mechanism 54B to change the orientation of the tray 600 by 180 degrees. That is, the second rotating mechanism 54B changes the orientation of the tray 600 after the display information of the rewrite card RC is changed at the second stop position Po22 so that the card holder 500 (that is, the rewrite card RC) faces the front of the tray discharging device 50A.
另外，在以卡片支架510A朝向托盘发出装置50A前方的状态发出托盘610这一用途的情况下，控制装置400也可以如上述那样驱动第二旋转机构54B。Furthermore, in the case of sending out the tray 610 with the card holder 510A facing the front of the tray sending-out device 50A, the control device 400 may drive the second rotating mechanism 54B as described above.
另外，托盘610被从第三停止位置Po23输送到托盘保管架60A，但是也可以从第一停止位置Po21或第二停止位置Po22输送到托盘保管架60A。但是，当将托盘610从第一停止位置Po21输送到托盘保管架60A时，托盘输送机构80将托盘610从第二停止位置Po22向第一停止位置Po21输送(返回)。因此，在托盘610向托盘保管架60A的输送完成之前，托盘输送机构80无法将后续的托盘610输送到第一停止位置Po21。另外，当将托盘610从第二停止位置Po22向托盘保管架60A输送时，在托盘610向托盘保管架60A的输送完成之前，托盘输送机构80无法将后续的托盘610输送到第二停止位置Po22。若考虑这一点，则优选将托盘610从第三停止位置Po23输送到托盘保管架60A。In addition, the pallet 610 is conveyed to the pallet storage rack 60A from the third stop position Po23, but may be conveyed to the pallet storage rack 60A from the first stop position Po21 or the second stop position Po22. However, when the pallet 610 is conveyed to the pallet storage rack 60A from the first stop position Po21, the pallet conveying mechanism 80 conveys (returns) the pallet 610 from the second stop position Po22 to the first stop position Po21. Therefore, before the conveyance of the pallet 610 to the pallet storage rack 60A is completed, the pallet conveying mechanism 80 cannot convey the subsequent pallet 610 to the first stop position Po21. In addition, when the pallet 610 is conveyed to the pallet storage rack 60A from the second stop position Po22, before the conveyance of the pallet 610 to the pallet storage rack 60A is completed, the pallet conveying mechanism 80 cannot convey the subsequent pallet 610 to the second stop position Po22. Considering this point, it is preferable to convey the pallet 610 to the pallet storage rack 60A from the third stop position Po23.
另外，设置于托盘发出装置50A底部的托盘输送机构80和旋转机构54，也可以同样地设置在托盘发出装置50中。但是，在托盘发出装置50中，卡片信息变更单元100设置在托盘发出装置50的跟前侧。因此，控制装置400控制第一旋转机构54A，以卡片支架500朝向托盘发出装置50的跟前侧的方式使托盘600旋转。In addition, the tray conveying mechanism 80 and the rotating mechanism 54 provided at the bottom of the tray issuing device 50A may also be provided in the tray issuing device 50. However, in the tray issuing device 50, the card information changing unit 100 is provided at the front side of the tray issuing device 50. Therefore, the control device 400 controls the first rotating mechanism 54A to rotate the tray 600 so that the card holder 500 faces the front side of the tray issuing device 50.
[托盘输送和托盘保管控制][Pallet conveying and pallet storage control]
升降装置300从托盘发出装置50A侧观察被插入到插入口53中的托盘保管架60A，并以例如以下的(1)～(4)的任一方式依次输送多个托盘610。在实施方式一中也可以同样地将托盘600输送到托盘保管架60。托盘610的输送形态是根据各用户的便利性设定。The lifting device 300 observes the tray storage rack 60A inserted into the insertion port 53 from the tray delivery device 50A side, and sequentially transports a plurality of trays 610 in any of the following methods (1) to (4). In the first embodiment, the trays 600 can also be transported to the tray storage rack 60 in the same manner. The transport mode of the trays 610 is set according to the convenience of each user.
(1)升降装置300将托盘610从最右列的最上层依次向最下层输送之后，从相邻列(图28的例子中为中央列)的最上层朝向最下层依次输送托盘610。然后，升降装置300将托盘610从最左列的最上层依次向最下层输送。(1) After the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the uppermost layer of the rightmost column to the lowermost layer, the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the uppermost layer of the adjacent column (the central column in the example of FIG. 28 ) to the lowermost layer. Then, the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the uppermost layer of the leftmost column to the lowermost layer.
(2)升降装置300将托盘610从最左列的最上层依次向最下层输送之后，从中央列的最上层朝向最下层依次输送托盘610。然后，升降装置300将托盘610从最右列的最上层依次向最下层输送。(2) After the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the uppermost layer of the leftmost column to the lowermost layer, the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the uppermost layer of the center column to the lowermost layer. Then, the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the uppermost layer of the rightmost column to the lowermost layer.
(3)升降装置300将托盘610从最上层的最右列依次向最左列输送之后，从相邻下层的最右列朝向最左列依次输送托盘610。升降装置300重复该输送动作并将托盘610依次输送到最下层。(3) After the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the rightmost column of the uppermost layer to the leftmost column, the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the rightmost column to the leftmost column of the adjacent lower layer. The lifting device 300 repeats this transporting operation and sequentially transports the trays 610 to the lowermost layer.
(4)升降装置300将托盘610从最上层的最左列依次向最右列输送之后，从相邻下层的最左列朝向最右列依次输送托盘610。升降装置300重复该输送动作并将托盘610依次输送到最下层。(4) After the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the leftmost row to the rightmost row of the uppermost layer, the lifting device 300 sequentially transports the trays 610 from the leftmost row to the rightmost row of the adjacent lower layer. The lifting device 300 repeats this transporting operation and sequentially transports the trays 610 to the lowermost layer.
在本实施方式中，说明的是通过上述(3)将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的情况。In this embodiment, the case where the tray 610 is conveyed to the tray storage rack 60A by the above-mentioned (3) is described.
在此，在将托盘保管架60A安装于托盘发出装置50A时，与将托盘保管架60安装于托盘发出装置50A时相比，托盘保管架60A的最下层靠近托盘发出装置50A的底部(托盘输送机构80)。即，托盘保管架60A的最下层位于比托盘保管架60的最下层低的位置。考虑在将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层的某一保管位置时，托盘610被载置在与该保管位置相对的托盘输送机构80上这一情况。该情况下，有可能发生如下情况：作为输送对象的托盘610与被载置在托盘输送机构80上的托盘610发生碰撞，从而无法将作为输送对象的托盘610保管在该保管位置。Here, when the pallet storage rack 60A is mounted on the pallet delivery device 50A, the lowest level of the pallet storage rack 60A is closer to the bottom of the pallet delivery device 50A (pallet conveying mechanism 80) than when the pallet storage rack 60 is mounted on the pallet delivery device 50A. That is, the lowest level of the pallet storage rack 60A is located at a position lower than the lowest level of the pallet storage rack 60. Consider a case where the pallet 610 is transported to a certain storage position at the lowest level of the pallet storage rack 60A and the pallet 610 is placed on the pallet conveying mechanism 80 opposite to the storage position. In this case, there is a possibility that the pallet 610 to be transported collides with the pallet 610 placed on the pallet conveying mechanism 80, and the pallet 610 to be transported cannot be stored at the storage position.
在本实施方式中，当将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层时，控制装置400控制托盘610的输送，以使托盘610不会被载置在托盘发出装置50A的底部上的与托盘610被输送的保管位置相对的位置上。控制装置400控制第一托盘输送机构80A～第三托盘输送机构80C、设置于注射单打印装置40中的托盘输送机构80(为方便起见，在此称为“第四托盘输送机构80D”)、以及升降装置300，从而实现上述输送处理。由此，即使在使用托盘保管架60A的情况下，也能够在使托盘610彼此不会发生碰撞的情况下，将托盘610安全地输送到托盘保管架60A。另外，也不需要为了安全输送而设置另外的装置。In this embodiment, when the tray 610 is transported to the bottom layer of the tray storage rack 60A, the control device 400 controls the transport of the tray 610 so that the tray 610 is not placed at a position on the bottom of the tray delivery device 50A that is opposite to the storage position where the tray 610 is transported. The control device 400 controls the first tray transport mechanism 80A to the third tray transport mechanism 80C, the tray transport mechanism 80 (for convenience, referred to as the "fourth tray transport mechanism 80D") provided in the injection order printing device 40, and the lifting device 300, thereby realizing the above-mentioned transport processing. As a result, even when the tray storage rack 60A is used, the tray 610 can be safely transported to the tray storage rack 60A without causing the trays 610 to collide with each other. In addition, there is no need to provide another device for safe transport.
图29是表示将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置时(正常输送时)的、托盘610的输送例的图。图30是表示将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层中的与第三停止位置Po23相对的保管位置(最下层的第三位置)时的、托盘610的输送例的图。图31中的31001是表示将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层中的与第二停止位置Po22相对的保管位置(最下层的第二位置)时的、托盘610的输送例的图。图31中的31002是表示将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层中的与第一停止位置Po21相对的保管位置(最下层的第一位置)时的、托盘610的输送例的图。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of conveying the pallet 610 when conveying the pallet 610 to a storage position other than the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A (during normal conveyance). FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of conveying the pallet 610 when conveying the pallet 610 to a storage position (the third position of the bottom layer) opposite to the third stop position Po23 in the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A. 31001 in FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of conveying the pallet 610 when conveying the pallet 610 to a storage position (the second position of the bottom layer) opposite to the second stop position Po22 in the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A. 31002 in FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of conveying the pallet 610 when conveying the pallet 610 to a storage position (the first position of the bottom layer) opposite to the first stop position Po21 in the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A.
另外，在这些附图中，为了区分由托盘输送机构80依次输送的托盘610，方便起见，将托盘610表示为托盘610A～610D、托盘610P～610V。作为图29～图31的代表，在图29的S11中示出卡片信息变更单元100。对于第一托盘输送机构80A～第三托盘输送机构80C、第一旋转机构54A、以及第二旋转机构54B，请参照图27中的27002。In addition, in these drawings, in order to distinguish the trays 610 sequentially transported by the tray transport mechanism 80, the trays 610 are represented as trays 610A to 610D and trays 610P to 610V for convenience. As a representative of Figures 29 to 31, the card information changing unit 100 is shown in S11 of Figure 29. For the first tray transport mechanism 80A to the third tray transport mechanism 80C, the first rotating mechanism 54A, and the second rotating mechanism 54B, please refer to 27002 in Figure 27.
(正常输送时的托盘输送处理)(Pallet handling during normal transport)
使用图29，对在托盘610A之后托盘610B被输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置时的托盘输送处理进行说明。The tray conveying process when the tray 610B is conveyed to a storage position other than the bottommost level of the tray storage rack 60A after the tray 610A will be described with reference to FIG. 29 .
如图29所示，第四托盘输送机构80D和第一托盘输送机构80A将托盘610A从注射单打印装置40向第一停止位置Po21输送(S 11)。然后，在第一停止位置Po21处，第一旋转机构54A改变托盘610A的朝向，使卡片支架510A面对卡片信息变更单元100(S 12)。As shown in Fig. 29, the fourth tray conveying mechanism 80D and the first tray conveying mechanism 80A convey the tray 610A from the injection slip printing device 40 to the first stop position Po21 (S11). Then, at the first stop position Po21, the first rotating mechanism 54A changes the orientation of the tray 610A so that the card holder 510A faces the card information changing unit 100 (S12).
此后，第一托盘输送机构80A和第二托盘输送机构80B将托盘610A从第一停止位置Po21向第二停止位置Po22输送(S 13)。此时，第四托盘输送机构80D和第一托盘输送机构80A将托盘610B从注射单打印装置40向第一停止位置Po21输送。Then, the first tray conveying mechanism 80A and the second tray conveying mechanism 80B convey the tray 610A from the first stop position Po21 to the second stop position Po22 (S13). At this time, the fourth tray conveying mechanism 80D and the first tray conveying mechanism 80A convey the tray 610B from the injection printing device 40 to the first stop position Po21.
然后，在第二停止位置Po22处，卡片信息变更单元100将被安装在托盘610A的卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更(S 14)。此时，在第一停止位置Po21处，第一旋转机构54A改变托盘610B的朝向，使卡片支架510A面对卡片信息变更单元100。Then, at the second stop position Po22, the card information change unit 100 changes the display information of the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A of the tray 610A (S14). At this time, at the first stop position Po21, the first rotating mechanism 54A changes the direction of the tray 610B so that the card holder 510A faces the card information change unit 100.
此后，第二托盘输送机构80B和第三托盘输送机构80C将托盘610A从第二停止位置Po22向第三停止位置Po23输送(S 15)。此时，第一托盘输送机构80A和第二托盘输送机构80B将托盘610B从第一停止位置Po21向第二停止位置Po22输送。另外，第四托盘输送机构80D和第一托盘输送机构80A将托盘610C从注射单打印装置40向第一停止位置Po21输送。Thereafter, the second tray conveying mechanism 80B and the third tray conveying mechanism 80C convey the tray 610A from the second stop position Po22 to the third stop position Po23 (S15). At this time, the first tray conveying mechanism 80A and the second tray conveying mechanism 80B convey the tray 610B from the first stop position Po21 to the second stop position Po22. In addition, the fourth tray conveying mechanism 80D and the first tray conveying mechanism 80A convey the tray 610C from the injection sheet printing device 40 to the first stop position Po21.
然后，升降装置300开始将托盘610A从第三停止位置Po23向托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置输送(S 16)。此时，在第二停止位置Po22处，卡片信息变更单元100将被安装在托盘610B的卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更。另外，在第一停止位置Po21处，第一旋转机构54A改变托盘610C的朝向，使卡片支架510A面对卡片信息变更单元100。Then, the lifting device 300 starts to transport the tray 610A from the third stop position Po23 to a storage position other than the bottom layer of the tray storage rack 60A (S16). At this time, at the second stop position Po22, the card information change unit 100 changes the display information of the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A of the tray 610B. In addition, at the first stop position Po21, the first rotating mechanism 54A changes the direction of the tray 610C so that the card holder 510A faces the card information change unit 100.
之后，在升降装置300将托盘610A保管于托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置的期间，第二托盘输送机构80B和第三托盘输送机构80C将托盘610B从第二停止位置Po22向第三停止位置Po23输送(S 17)。所谓的“保管期间”是指：升降装置300从开始将托盘610向托盘保管架60A输送起至托盘610被保管于保管位置为止的期间。此时，第一托盘输送机构80A和第二托盘输送机构80B将托盘610C从第一停止位置Po21向第二停止位置Po22输送。另外，第四托盘输送机构80D和第一托盘输送机构80A将托盘610D从注射单打印装置40向第一停止位置Po21输送。After that, while the lifting device 300 stores the pallet 610A at a storage position other than the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A, the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B and the third pallet conveying mechanism 80C convey the pallet 610B from the second stop position Po22 to the third stop position Po23 (S17). The so-called "storage period" refers to the period from when the lifting device 300 starts to convey the pallet 610 to the pallet storage rack 60A until the pallet 610 is stored at the storage position. At this time, the first pallet conveying mechanism 80A and the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B convey the pallet 610C from the first stop position Po21 to the second stop position Po22. In addition, the fourth pallet conveying mechanism 80D and the first pallet conveying mechanism 80A convey the pallet 610D from the injection order printing device 40 to the first stop position Po21.
然后，升降装置300开始将托盘610B从第三停止位置Po23输送向托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置(S 18)。此时，在第二停止位置Po22处，卡片信息变更单元100将被安装在托盘610C的卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更。另外，在第一停止位置Po21处，第一旋转机构54A改变托盘610D的朝向，使卡片支架510A面对卡片信息变更单元100。Then, the lifting device 300 starts to transport the tray 610B from the third stop position Po23 to a storage position other than the bottom layer of the tray storage rack 60A (S18). At this time, at the second stop position Po22, the card information change unit 100 changes the display information of the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A of the tray 610C. In addition, at the first stop position Po21, the first rotating mechanism 54A changes the direction of the tray 610D so that the card holder 510A faces the card information change unit 100.
通过重复该处理，升降装置300将由托盘输送机构80输送至第三停止位置Po23的各托盘610依次向托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置输送。By repeating this process, the lifting device 300 sequentially transports each of the pallets 610 transported to the third stop position Po23 by the pallet transport mechanism 80 to a storage position other than the lowermost level of the pallet storage rack 60A.
(保管于最下层第三位置时的托盘输送处理)(Pallet conveying process when stored at the third position on the bottom layer)
使用图30，对托盘610S被输送到与第三停止位置Po23相对的托盘保管架60A的最下层第三位置时的托盘输送处理进行说明。托盘610P、托盘610Q及托盘610R从第三停止位置Po23被输送到托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置为止的处理(S21～S25)，是通过重复进行图29所示的S16～S18的处理而实现。The tray conveying process when the tray 610S is conveyed to the third position of the bottom layer of the tray storage rack 60A opposite to the third stop position Po23 will be described using Fig. 30. The process (S21 to S25) of conveying the tray 610P, the tray 610Q, and the tray 610R from the third stop position Po23 to the storage position other than the bottom layer of the tray storage rack 60A is realized by repeating the processes of S16 to S18 shown in Fig. 29.
在S26中，在升降装置300将托盘610R保管于托盘保管架60A的最下层以外的保管位置的期间，第二托盘输送机构80B和第三托盘输送机构80C将托盘610S从第二停止位置Po22向第三停止位置Po23输送。此时，第一托盘输送机构80A和第二托盘输送机构80B将托盘610T从第一停止位置Po21向第二停止位置Po22输送。另外，第四托盘输送机构80D和第一托盘输送机构80A将托盘610U从注射单打印装置40向第一停止位置Po21输送。In S26, while the lifting device 300 stores the tray 610R at a storage position other than the bottom layer of the tray storage rack 60A, the second tray conveying mechanism 80B and the third tray conveying mechanism 80C convey the tray 610S from the second stop position Po22 to the third stop position Po23. At this time, the first tray conveying mechanism 80A and the second tray conveying mechanism 80B convey the tray 610T from the first stop position Po21 to the second stop position Po22. In addition, the fourth tray conveying mechanism 80D and the first tray conveying mechanism 80A convey the tray 610U from the injection sheet printing device 40 to the first stop position Po21.
然后，升降装置300开始将托盘610S从第三停止位置Po23向托盘保管架60A的最下层第三位置输送(S27)。此时，在第二停止位置Po22处，卡片信息变更单元100将被安装在托盘610T的卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更。另外，在第一停止位置Po21处，第一旋转机构54A改变托盘610U的朝向，使卡片支架510A面对卡片信息变更单元100。Then, the lifting device 300 starts to transport the tray 610S from the third stop position Po23 to the third position at the bottom of the tray storage rack 60A (S27). At this time, at the second stop position Po22, the card information change unit 100 changes the display information of the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A of the tray 610T. In addition, at the first stop position Po21, the first rotating mechanism 54A changes the direction of the tray 610U so that the card holder 510A faces the card information change unit 100.
之后，在升降装置300将托盘610S保管于托盘保管架60A的最下层第三位置的期间，第一托盘输送机构80A～第四托盘输送机构80D不进行驱动，使托盘610T、托盘610U以及托盘610V停止不动(S28)。由此，升降装置300能够以在第三停止位置Po23处托盘610S与托盘610T不发生碰撞的方式，将托盘610S输送并保管于托盘保管架60A的最下层第三位置。After that, while the lifting device 300 stores the pallet 610S at the third position at the bottom of the pallet storage rack 60A, the first to fourth pallet conveying mechanisms 80A to 80D are not driven, and the pallet 610T, the pallet 610U, and the pallet 610V are stopped (S28). Thus, the lifting device 300 can convey and store the pallet 610S at the third position at the bottom of the pallet storage rack 60A without causing the pallet 610S to collide with the pallet 610T at the third stop position Po23.
(保管于最下层第二位置时的托盘输送处理)(Pallet conveying process when stored at the second position on the bottom layer)
使用图31的31001，对托盘610S被输送到与第二停止位置Po22相对的托盘保管架60A的最下层第二位置时的托盘输送处理进行说明。The tray conveying process when the tray 610S is conveyed to the lowermost second position of the tray storage rack 60A facing the second stop position Po22 will be described using 31001 in FIG. 31 .
在图30的S26的处理之后，升降装置300在第三停止位置Po23处将托盘610S抬起(S31)。升降装置300将托盘610S抬起至与载置在第二停止位置Po22处的托盘610T不发生碰撞这一程度的高度(安全位置)。另外，此时，在第二停止位置Po22处，卡片信息变更单元100将被安装在托盘610T的卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更。另外，在第一停止位置Po21处，第一旋转机构54A改变托盘610U的朝向，使卡片支架510A面对卡片信息变更单元100。After the processing of S26 of FIG. 30 , the lifting device 300 lifts the tray 610S at the third stop position Po23 (S31). The lifting device 300 lifts the tray 610S to a height (safe position) at which it does not collide with the tray 610T placed at the second stop position Po22. In addition, at this time, at the second stop position Po22, the card information change unit 100 changes the display information of the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A of the tray 610T. In addition, at the first stop position Po21, the first rotating mechanism 54A changes the orientation of the tray 610U so that the card holder 510A faces the card information change unit 100.
然后，升降装置300将抬起的托盘610S从第三停止位置Po23输送到第二停止位置Po22(S32)。但是，升降装置300维持托盘610S被抬起的状态，并且不将托盘610S载置于第二停止位置Po22。此时，第二托盘输送机构80B和第三托盘输送机构80C将托盘610T从第二停止位置Po22向第三停止位置Po23输送。另外，在该输送期间，第一托盘输送机构80A和第二托盘输送机构80B不进行驱动，使托盘610U停止不动。Then, the lifting device 300 transports the lifted pallet 610S from the third stop position Po23 to the second stop position Po22 (S32). However, the lifting device 300 maintains the state in which the pallet 610S is lifted, and does not place the pallet 610S at the second stop position Po22. At this time, the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B and the third pallet conveying mechanism 80C convey the pallet 610T from the second stop position Po22 to the third stop position Po23. In addition, during this conveying, the first pallet conveying mechanism 80A and the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B are not driven, and the pallet 610U is stopped.
之后，升降装置300开始将托盘610S从第二停止位置Po22向托盘保管架60A的最下层第二位置输送(S33)。在托盘610S的保管期间，第一托盘输送机构80A～第四托盘输送机构80D不进行驱动，使托盘610T、托盘610U以及托盘610V停止不动(S34)。After that, the lifting device 300 starts to transport the pallet 610S from the second stop position Po22 to the second position at the bottom of the pallet storage rack 60A (S33). During the storage of the pallet 610S, the first to fourth pallet conveying mechanisms 80A to 80D are not driven, and the pallet 610T, the pallet 610U, and the pallet 610V are stopped (S34).
如此，在将托盘610S输送到第二停止位置Po22时，升降装置300使托盘610T从第二停止位置Po22移动，并且，第一托盘输送机构80A和第二托盘输送机构80B使托盘610U停止不动。因此，在托盘610S被从第二停止位置Po22朝向托盘保管架60A的最下层第二位置输送并保管时，能够形成为：在第二停止位置Po22停止的托盘610不存在的状态。因此，升降装置300能够以托盘610S不会与后续的托盘610T及托盘610U碰撞的方式，将托盘610S输送并保管于托盘保管架60A的最下层第二位置。Thus, when the pallet 610S is conveyed to the second stop position Po22, the lifting device 300 moves the pallet 610T from the second stop position Po22, and the first pallet conveying mechanism 80A and the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B stop the pallet 610U. Therefore, when the pallet 610S is conveyed and stored from the second stop position Po22 toward the second position at the bottom of the pallet storage rack 60A, a state can be formed in which the pallet 610 stopped at the second stop position Po22 does not exist. Therefore, the lifting device 300 can convey and store the pallet 610S at the second position at the bottom of the pallet storage rack 60A in a manner that the pallet 610S does not collide with the subsequent pallets 610T and 610U.
(保管于最下层第一位置时的托盘输送处理)(Pallet conveying process when stored at the first position on the bottom layer)
使用图31的31002，对托盘610S被输送到与第二停止位置Po22相对的托盘保管架60A的最下层第一位置时的托盘输送处理进行说明。The tray conveying process when the tray 610S is conveyed to the lowermost first position of the tray storage rack 60A facing the second stop position Po22 will be described using 31002 in FIG. 31 .
在图30的S26的处理之后，与图31的S31同样地，升降装置300在第三停止位置Po23处将托盘610S抬起(S41)。此时，在第二停止位置Po22处，卡片信息变更单元100将被安装在托盘610T的卡片支架510A上的重写卡RC的显示信息进行变更。另外，在第一停止位置Po21处，第一旋转机构54A改变托盘610U的朝向，使卡片支架510A面对卡片信息变更单元100。After the processing of S26 of FIG. 30 , similarly to S31 of FIG. 31 , the lifting device 300 lifts the tray 610S at the third stop position Po23 (S41). At this time, at the second stop position Po22, the card information change unit 100 changes the display information of the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A of the tray 610T. In addition, at the first stop position Po21, the first rotating mechanism 54A changes the orientation of the tray 610U so that the card holder 510A faces the card information change unit 100.
然后，升降装置300将抬起的托盘610S从第三停止位置Po23输送到第一停止位置Po21(S42)。但是，升降装置300维持托盘610S被抬起的状态，并且不将托盘610S载置于第一停止位置Po21。此时，第二托盘输送机构80B和第三托盘输送机构80C将托盘610T从第二停止位置Po22向第三停止位置Po23输送。另外，第一托盘输送机构80A和第二托盘输送机构80B将托盘610U从第一停止位置Po21向第二停止位置Po22输送。第四托盘输送机构80D不进行驱动，使托盘610V停止不动。Then, the lifting device 300 conveys the lifted pallet 610S from the third stop position Po23 to the first stop position Po21 (S42). However, the lifting device 300 maintains the state in which the pallet 610S is lifted, and does not place the pallet 610S at the first stop position Po21. At this time, the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B and the third pallet conveying mechanism 80C convey the pallet 610T from the second stop position Po22 to the third stop position Po23. In addition, the first pallet conveying mechanism 80A and the second pallet conveying mechanism 80B convey the pallet 610U from the first stop position Po21 to the second stop position Po22. The fourth pallet conveying mechanism 80D does not drive, and the pallet 610V stops.
之后，升降装置300开始将托盘610S从第二停止位置Po22向托盘保管架60A的最下层第一位置输送(S43)。在托盘610S的保管期间，第一托盘输送机构80A～第四托盘输送机构80D不进行驱动，使托盘610T、托盘610U以及托盘610V停止不动(S44)。After that, the lifting device 300 starts to transport the pallet 610S from the second stop position Po22 to the first position at the bottom of the pallet storage rack 60A (S43). During the storage of the pallet 610S, the first to fourth pallet conveying mechanisms 80A to 80D are not driven, and the pallet 610T, the pallet 610U, and the pallet 610V are stopped (S44).
如此，在将托盘610S输送到第一停止位置Po21时，升降装置300使托盘610T从第二停止位置Po22移动，并且使托盘610U从第一停止位置Po21移动。另外，第四托盘输送机构80D使托盘610V停止不动。因此，在托盘610S被从第一停止位置Po21朝向托盘保管架60A的最下层第一位置输送并保管时，能够形成为：在第一停止位置Po21停止的托盘610不存在的状态。因此，升降装置300能够以托盘610S不会与后续的托盘610T、托盘610U及托盘610V碰撞的方式，将托盘610S输送并保管于托盘保管架60A的最下层第一位置。Thus, when the pallet 610S is conveyed to the first stop position Po21, the lifting device 300 moves the pallet 610T from the second stop position Po22 and moves the pallet 610U from the first stop position Po21. In addition, the fourth pallet conveying mechanism 80D stops the pallet 610V. Therefore, when the pallet 610S is conveyed from the first stop position Po21 to the first position of the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A and stored, it is possible to form a state where the pallet 610 stopped at the first stop position Po21 does not exist. Therefore, the lifting device 300 can convey and store the pallet 610S at the first position of the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A in a manner that the pallet 610S does not collide with the subsequent pallets 610T, 610U, and 610V.
(其他的处理)(Other processing)
另外，控制装置400也可以构成为：在使发药系统1A工作时(至少开始向托盘保管架60A输送托盘610时)，判断托盘610是否被保管在托盘保管架60A的下部两层的各保管位置中。Furthermore, the control device 400 may be configured to determine whether the tray 610 is stored in each storage position of the lower two layers of the tray storage rack 60A when the medicine dispensing system 1A is operated (at least when the tray 610 starts to be transported to the tray storage rack 60A).
第一托盘输送机构80A～第四托盘输送机构80D将托盘610朝向第一停止位置Po21～第三停止位置Po23进行输送，但在其相反方向上不进行输送。因此，当在第一停止位置Po21～第三停止位置Po23上全部停止有托盘610时，第一托盘输送机构80A～第四托盘输送机构80D无法使第一停止位置Po21～第三停止位置Po23中的任一处位置空出。因此，在仅托盘保管架60A的最下层空出且第一停止位置Po21～第三停止位置Po23上全部停止有托盘610时，在执行了将托盘610输送到托盘保管架60A的处理的情况下，托盘610会相互发生碰撞。The first to fourth pallet conveying mechanisms 80A to 80D convey the pallets 610 toward the first to third stop positions Po21 to Po23, but do not convey them in the opposite direction. Therefore, when all the pallets 610 are stopped at the first to third stop positions Po21 to Po23, the first to fourth pallet conveying mechanisms 80A to 80D cannot vacate any of the first to third stop positions Po21 to Po23. Therefore, when only the bottom layer of the pallet storage rack 60A is vacant and all the pallets 610 are stopped at the first to third stop positions Po21 to Po23, when the process of conveying the pallets 610 to the pallet storage rack 60A is executed, the pallets 610 collide with each other.
通过执行如上所述的判断处理，在托盘保管架60A的从下数第二层中任一保管位置均未空出的情况下、且最下层空出的情况下，控制装置400能够执行上述的朝向最下层的输送处理。因此，能够降低托盘610相互碰撞的可能性。By executing the above determination process, when no storage position in the second layer from the bottom of the pallet storage rack 60A is vacant and the bottom layer is vacant, the control device 400 can execute the above-mentioned conveyance process toward the bottom layer. Therefore, the possibility of collision between the pallets 610 can be reduced.
[锁定机构][Locking mechanism]
图32是表示锁定机构58的一例的立体图。图33是表示锁定机构58的动作例的图。Fig. 32 is a perspective view showing an example of the lock mechanism 58. Fig. 33 is a view showing an example of the operation of the lock mechanism 58.
如图27中的27001和图32中的32001所示，托盘发出装置50A具备锁定机构58。锁定机构58是当托盘保管架60A被插入了插入口53时，将托盘保管架60A临时固定于托盘发出装置50A的固定部件。如图27中的27001所示，锁定机构58设置在托盘发出装置50A的框体51中的、限定插入口53的部分的一部分上。锁定机构58设置在框体51中的与托盘保管架60A的两个侧壁62A分别相对的位置处。As shown in 27001 in FIG. 27 and 32001 in FIG. 32 , the pallet sending device 50A is provided with a locking mechanism 58. The locking mechanism 58 is a fixing member that temporarily fixes the pallet storage rack 60A to the pallet sending device 50A when the pallet storage rack 60A is inserted into the insertion port 53. As shown in 27001 in FIG. 27 , the locking mechanism 58 is provided on a part of the portion defining the insertion port 53 in the frame 51 of the pallet sending device 50A. The locking mechanism 58 is provided at positions in the frame 51 that are opposite to the two side walls 62A of the pallet storage rack 60A.
实施方式一的托盘发出装置50上，作为临时固定托盘保管架60的固定部件而设置有磁铁。由于构成托盘保管架60的框架由铁制成，因此托盘保管架60通过磁铁被固定于托盘发出装置50。另一方面，由于构成托盘保管架60A的框架由铝制成，因此托盘保管架60A不通过磁铁固定于托盘发出装置50A。因此，在托盘发出装置50A上设置有将托盘保管架60A机械地固定的锁定机构58。The pallet delivery device 50 of the first embodiment is provided with a magnet as a fixing member for temporarily fixing the pallet storage rack 60. Since the frame constituting the pallet storage rack 60 is made of iron, the pallet storage rack 60 is fixed to the pallet delivery device 50 by the magnet. On the other hand, since the frame constituting the pallet storage rack 60A is made of aluminum, the pallet storage rack 60A is not fixed to the pallet delivery device 50A by the magnet. Therefore, the pallet delivery device 50A is provided with a locking mechanism 58 for mechanically fixing the pallet storage rack 60A.
如图32中的32002所示，锁定机构58具备锁定部件581、卡片检测部582、辊583以及驱动部584。As shown in 32002 in FIG. 32 , the lock mechanism 58 includes a lock member 581 , a card detection unit 582 , a roller 583 , and a drive unit 584 .
在框体51中设置于相对位置处的两个锁定部件581，通过从两侧夹持被插入到插入口53中的托盘保管架60A，将托盘保管架60A固定。锁定部件581通过驱动部584的驱动，能够在垂直于侧壁585的方向(图33的33001中的箭头方向)上移动。通过驱动部584的驱动，改变锁定部件581从侧壁585突出的量。The two locking members 581 provided at opposite positions in the frame 51 fix the pallet storage rack 60A by clamping the pallet storage rack 60A inserted into the insertion port 53 from both sides. The locking members 581 can be moved in a direction perpendicular to the side wall 585 (the direction of the arrow in 33001 of FIG. 33 ) by the driving of the driving unit 584. The amount of protrusion of the locking members 581 from the side wall 585 is changed by the driving of the driving unit 584.
卡片检测部582检测被插入到插入口53中且被配置在托盘发出装置50A可输送托盘610的位置的托盘保管架60A。换言之，卡片检测部582检测被配置在由两个辊583保持的位置处的托盘保管架60A。The card detector 582 detects the tray storage rack 60A inserted into the insertion port 53 and arranged at a position where the tray discharging device 50A can convey the tray 610. In other words, the card detector 582 detects the tray storage rack 60A arranged at a position held by the two rollers 583.
在卡片检测部582未检测到托盘保管架60A的状态下(托盘保管架60A未被插入到插入口53中的状态下)，如图33中的33001所示，锁定部件581停止在突出量最小的最小突出位置处。When the card detection unit 582 does not detect the tray storage rack 60A (when the tray storage rack 60A is not inserted into the insertion port 53), the locking member 581 stops at the minimum protrusion position where the protrusion amount is the minimum, as shown by 33001 in FIG. 33 .
当卡片检测部582检测到托盘保管架60A时，如图33中的33002所示，驱动部584使锁定部件581从最小突出位置朝向突出量变为最大的最大突出位置(沿箭头方向)移动，并使其停止在最大突出位置处。在最大突出位置处，锁定部件581按压托盘保管架60A的侧壁62A。两个锁定部件581分别按压托盘保管架60A的侧壁62A，由此将托盘保管架60A夹在中间并固定。由此，在向托盘保管架60A输送托盘610的期间，能够相对于托盘发出装置50A固定托盘保管架60A。When the card detection unit 582 detects the tray storage rack 60A, as shown in 33002 in FIG. 33 , the driving unit 584 moves the locking member 581 from the minimum protruding position toward the maximum protruding position (in the direction of the arrow) where the protrusion amount becomes the maximum, and stops it at the maximum protruding position. At the maximum protruding position, the locking member 581 presses the side wall 62A of the tray storage rack 60A. The two locking members 581 press the side wall 62A of the tray storage rack 60A respectively, thereby sandwiching and fixing the tray storage rack 60A. Thus, while the tray 610 is being conveyed to the tray storage rack 60A, the tray storage rack 60A can be fixed relative to the tray sending device 50A.
当托盘610向托盘保管架60A的输送完成了时，控制装置400在触摸面板70(参照图1)上显示保管架更换消息(后述)，并且解除由锁定部件581实施的固定(锁定)。即，此时，驱动部584使锁定部件581从最大突出位置向最小突出位置移动。When the conveyance of the tray 610 to the tray storage rack 60A is completed, the control device 400 displays a storage rack replacement message (described later) on the touch panel 70 (see FIG. 1 ), and releases the fixation (lock) performed by the locking member 581. That is, at this time, the driving unit 584 moves the locking member 581 from the maximum protrusion position to the minimum protrusion position.
辊583与被插入到插入口53中的托盘保管架60A接触，并根据托盘保管架60A相对于插入口53的拔插而进行旋转。设置在框体51中相对位置处的两个辊583，通过从两侧夹持被插入到插入口53中的托盘保管架60A，从而保持托盘保管架60A。The roller 583 contacts the pallet storage rack 60A inserted into the insertion port 53, and rotates according to the insertion and removal of the pallet storage rack 60A with respect to the insertion port 53. The two rollers 583 provided at opposing positions in the frame 51 hold the pallet storage rack 60A inserted into the insertion port 53 from both sides, thereby holding the pallet storage rack 60A.
为了实现该夹持，辊583被连接于施力部件(例如：弹簧)。辊583与施力部件之间的连接关系，与图35中的辊593与施力部件591之间的连接关系相同。当托盘保管架60A被插入到插入口53中时，辊583通过施力部件的作用力按压托盘保管架60A的侧壁62A。即，两个辊583被施力部件施力，作为按压并保持托盘保管架60A的侧壁62A的卡片保持部发挥作用。In order to achieve this clamping, the roller 583 is connected to a force-applying member (e.g., a spring). The connection relationship between the roller 583 and the force-applying member is the same as the connection relationship between the roller 593 and the force-applying member 591 in FIG. 35 . When the tray storage rack 60A is inserted into the insertion port 53, the roller 583 presses the side wall 62A of the tray storage rack 60A by the force of the force-applying member. That is, the two rollers 583 are urged by the force-applying member to function as a card holding portion that presses and holds the side wall 62A of the tray storage rack 60A.
辊583辅助锁定部件581对托盘保管架60A的固定。辊583保持托盘保管架60A，直至插入到插入口53中的托盘保管架60A被锁定部件581固定。由此，能够降低托盘保管架60A由于地板倾斜等而开始移动的可能性。因此，用户在将托盘保管架60A插入于插入口53之后，可不等待锁定部件581实施的固定而从托盘保管架60A放手。另外，在锁定部件581的固定被解除且用户使托盘保管架60A移动为止的期间，辊583保持托盘保管架60A。由此，能够降低托盘保管架60A由于地板倾斜等而开始移动的可能性。因此，在锁定部件581的固定被解除之前或解除后不久时，用户不需要把持托盘保管架60A。The roller 583 assists the locking member 581 in fixing the pallet storage rack 60A. The roller 583 holds the pallet storage rack 60A until the pallet storage rack 60A inserted into the insertion port 53 is fixed by the locking member 581. Thus, the possibility that the pallet storage rack 60A starts to move due to the tilt of the floor, etc. can be reduced. Therefore, after inserting the pallet storage rack 60A into the insertion port 53, the user can let go of the pallet storage rack 60A without waiting for the locking member 581 to fix it. In addition, the roller 583 holds the pallet storage rack 60A until the fixing of the locking member 581 is released and the user moves the pallet storage rack 60A. Thus, the possibility that the pallet storage rack 60A starts to move due to the tilt of the floor, etc. can be reduced. Therefore, before or shortly after the fixing of the locking member 581 is released, the user does not need to hold the pallet storage rack 60A.
<变形例><Modification>
图34是表示作为锁定机构58的变形例的锁定机构58A的一例的图。图34中的34001是锁定机构58A的立体图，34002是锁定机构58A的主视图。图35是表示锁定机构58A的内部结构的俯视图。图35中的35001是用于说明托盘保管架60A被插入插入口53时的锁定机构58A的动作的图。图35中的35002是用于说明托盘保管架60A被从插入口53拉出时的锁定机构58A的动作的图。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a locking mechanism 58A as a modified example of the locking mechanism 58. 34001 in FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the locking mechanism 58A, and 34002 is a front view of the locking mechanism 58A. FIG. 35 is a top view showing the internal structure of the locking mechanism 58A. 35001 in FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the locking mechanism 58A when the tray storage rack 60A is inserted into the insertion port 53. 35002 in FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the locking mechanism 58A when the tray storage rack 60A is pulled out from the insertion port 53.
如图34所示，锁定机构58A具备卡片检测部582和辊593。锁定机构58A与锁定机构58的不同点在于：锁定机构58A未设置锁定部件581，且代替辊583而设有辊593。在锁定机构58A中，辊593实现锁定部件581的功能。As shown in Fig. 34, the lock mechanism 58A includes a card detection unit 582 and a roller 593. The lock mechanism 58A differs from the lock mechanism 58 in that the lock mechanism 58A does not include the lock member 581 and includes a roller 593 instead of the roller 583. In the lock mechanism 58A, the roller 593 realizes the function of the lock member 581.
如图35所示，锁定机构58A具备施力部件591、棘轮机构592、辊593、驱动部594、以及轴部595。As shown in FIG. 35 , the lock mechanism 58A includes a biasing member 591 , a ratchet mechanism 592 , a roller 593 , a driving portion 594 , and a shaft portion 595 .
施力部件591连接于辊593，并且对辊593施加作用力，以使得如上所述，根据插入口53中的托盘保管架60A的拔插而辊593能够按压托盘保管架60A。如图35中的35001所示，当托盘保管架60A被插入到插入口53中时，辊593通过施力部件591的作用力而按压托盘保管架60A的侧壁62A。The force applying member 591 is connected to the roller 593, and applies a force to the roller 593 so that the roller 593 can press the pallet storage rack 60A according to the insertion and removal of the pallet storage rack 60A in the insertion port 53 as described above. As shown in 35001 in FIG. 35, when the pallet storage rack 60A is inserted into the insertion port 53, the roller 593 presses the side wall 62A of the pallet storage rack 60A by the force of the force applying member 591.
棘轮机构592连接于辊593，并限制辊593的旋转方向为一个方向。棘轮机构592具备齿轮592A和棘爪592B。齿轮592A设置在辊593的旋转轴上。通过棘爪592B，齿轮592A的旋转方向被限制为一个方向。The ratchet mechanism 592 is connected to the roller 593 and restricts the rotation direction of the roller 593 to one direction. The ratchet mechanism 592 includes a gear 592A and a ratchet 592B. The gear 592A is provided on the rotation axis of the roller 593. The rotation direction of the gear 592A is restricted to one direction by the ratchet 592B.
驱动部594使棘爪592B以轴部595为轴进行旋转。由此，能够进行下述两状态的切换：即，使棘爪592B钩在齿轮592A上而使棘轮机构592起作用的状态，和棘爪592B从齿轮592A离开而使棘轮机构592不起作用的状态。The driving unit 594 rotates the pawl 592B about the shaft 595. This allows switching between two states: a state in which the pawl 592B is hooked on the gear 592A to activate the ratchet mechanism 592 and a state in which the pawl 592B is separated from the gear 592A to deactivate the ratchet mechanism 592.
如图35中的35001所示，当托盘保管架60A被插入到插入口53中时，驱动部594使棘爪592B从齿轮592A离开而使棘轮机构592不起作用。该情况下，辊593与辊583同样地能够自由旋转。因此，用户能够将托盘保管架60A顺利地插入到插入口53中。在插入到插入口53中之后，通过由辊593对托盘保管架60A的侧壁62A进行按压，从而能够保持托盘保管架60A不移动。As shown in 35001 in FIG. 35 , when the pallet storage rack 60A is inserted into the insertion port 53, the driving unit 594 causes the ratchet 592B to separate from the gear 592A and the ratchet mechanism 592 to be inoperative. In this case, the roller 593 can rotate freely like the roller 583. Therefore, the user can smoothly insert the pallet storage rack 60A into the insertion port 53. After being inserted into the insertion port 53, the roller 593 presses the side wall 62A of the pallet storage rack 60A, thereby preventing the pallet storage rack 60A from moving.
当卡片检测部582检测到托盘保管架60A时，如图35中的35002所示，驱动部594使棘爪592B钩在齿轮592A上而使棘轮机构592起作用。由此，辊593的旋转方向被限制在一个方向(托盘保管架60A的插入方向)上。因此，能够降低在将托盘610向托盘保管架60A输送的期间，托盘保管架60A向其相反方向移动而从插入口53脱落的可能性。When the card detection unit 582 detects the tray storage rack 60A, as shown in 35002 in FIG. 35 , the driving unit 594 causes the ratchet 592B to hook the gear 592A and activate the ratchet mechanism 592. As a result, the rotation direction of the roller 593 is limited to one direction (the insertion direction of the tray storage rack 60A). Therefore, the possibility that the tray storage rack 60A moves in the opposite direction to the insertion port 53 during the conveyance of the tray 610 to the tray storage rack 60A can be reduced.
当托盘610向托盘保管架60A的输送完成了时，控制装置400在触摸面板70上显示保管架更换消息(后述)，并且使棘爪592B从齿轮592A离开而解除棘轮机构592的功能。由此，辊593能够自由旋转。因此，用户能够从插入口53顺利地拉出托盘保管架60A。另外，棘轮机构592的功能的解除，也可以通过受理用户输入而执行。When the conveyance of the tray 610 to the tray storage rack 60A is completed, the control device 400 displays a storage rack replacement message (described later) on the touch panel 70, and causes the ratchet 592B to separate from the gear 592A to release the function of the ratchet mechanism 592. As a result, the roller 593 can rotate freely. Therefore, the user can smoothly pull out the tray storage rack 60A from the insertion port 53. In addition, the release of the function of the ratchet mechanism 592 can also be executed by accepting user input.
另外，当用户在棘轮机构592正起作用的状态下，以一定程度以上的力从插入口53拉出了托盘保管架60A时，能够使棘轮机构592的作用无效。即，该情况下，即使棘轮机构592起作用，也能够从插入口53拉出托盘保管架60A。此功能例如在非正常时有效。Furthermore, when the user pulls out the tray storage rack 60A from the insertion port 53 with a force greater than a certain level while the ratchet mechanism 592 is in effect, the action of the ratchet mechanism 592 can be disabled. That is, in this case, even if the ratchet mechanism 592 is in effect, the tray storage rack 60A can be pulled out from the insertion port 53. This function is effective, for example, in an abnormal situation.
[错误时的控制][Control when an error occurs]
例如，当在托盘发出装置50A内部发生了错误时，控制装置400停止驱动托盘输送机构80、卡片信息变更单元100以及升降装置300。另外，控制装置400经由触摸面板70通知用户发生了错误。用户接收该通知并对托盘发出装置50A的内部进行确认。For example, when an error occurs inside the tray delivery device 50A, the control device 400 stops driving the tray conveying mechanism 80, the card information changing unit 100, and the lifting device 300. In addition, the control device 400 notifies the user of the error via the touch panel 70. The user receives the notification and checks the inside of the tray delivery device 50A.
例如，当由于第三停止位置Po23处的托盘610的旋转而托盘610被挤堆时，用户取出托盘610后，将其再次载置在托盘输送机构80上。此时，用户有可能改变托盘610的朝向而进行载置。当在托盘610的朝向被改变的状态下，将托盘610载置在第三停止位置Po23时，升降装置300无法以卡片支架510A的朝向面向规定方向的方式载置于托盘610的输送目的地(例如：托盘保管架60A)。另外，升降装置300有可能无法把持托盘610。For example, when the trays 610 are piled up due to the rotation of the trays 610 at the third stop position Po23, the user takes out the trays 610 and places them on the tray conveying mechanism 80 again. At this time, the user may place the trays 610 in a different direction. When the trays 610 are placed at the third stop position Po23 with the direction of the trays 610 changed, the lifting device 300 cannot place the trays 610 at the conveying destination (for example, the tray storage rack 60A) in a manner that the card holder 510A faces the prescribed direction. In addition, the lifting device 300 may not be able to hold the trays 610.
在本实施方式中，如图27的27002所示，在托盘发出装置50A的底部中，于限定托盘610的输送路的侧壁上的第三停止位置Po23的位置处设置有第一托盘检测部55。第一托盘检测部55设置在设有卡片信息变更单元100侧的侧壁上。第一托盘检测部55对托盘610被载置于第三停止位置Po23时的安装在卡片支架510A的重写卡RC进行检测。In this embodiment, as shown in 27002 of FIG. 27 , a first tray detection unit 55 is provided at the bottom of the tray dispensing device 50A at the position of the third stop position Po23 on the side wall defining the conveying path of the tray 610. The first tray detection unit 55 is provided on the side wall on the side where the card information changing unit 100 is provided. The first tray detection unit 55 detects the rewrite card RC mounted on the card holder 510A when the tray 610 is placed at the third stop position Po23.
即，当卡片支架510A的朝向未面向卡片信息变更单元100侧时，第一托盘检测部55无法检测重写卡RC。因此，通过设置第一托盘检测部55，控制装置400能够判断托盘610的朝向恰当与否。因此，在当用户将托盘610重新载置于第三停止位置Po23时，卡片支架510A的朝向未面向卡片信息变更单元100侧的情况下，控制装置400能够通知用户重新再次载置托盘610。That is, when the card holder 510A is not oriented toward the card information change unit 100, the first tray detection unit 55 cannot detect the rewrite card RC. Therefore, by providing the first tray detection unit 55, the control device 400 can determine whether the orientation of the tray 610 is appropriate. Therefore, when the user re-mounts the tray 610 at the third stop position Po23, if the card holder 510A is not oriented toward the card information change unit 100, the control device 400 can notify the user to re-mount the tray 610.
另外，在本实施方式中，当用户取出托盘610后再次将其载置于托盘输送机构80上时，托盘输送机构80使托盘610从第三停止位置Po23向与第二停止位置Po22相反的一侧移动规定距离(例如：数厘米左右)。然后，托盘输送机构80执行返回第三停止位置Po23的处理。通过执行该处理，控制装置400能够判断托盘610是否与上述侧壁及托盘输送机构80大致平行地被载置于第三停止位置Po23处。托盘610与上述侧壁及托盘输送机构80大致平行地被载置的状态，是托盘610被恰当地载置的状态。In addition, in the present embodiment, when the user takes out the tray 610 and places it on the tray conveying mechanism 80 again, the tray conveying mechanism 80 moves the tray 610 from the third stop position Po23 to the side opposite to the second stop position Po22 by a predetermined distance (for example, about several centimeters). Then, the tray conveying mechanism 80 performs a process of returning to the third stop position Po23. By performing this process, the control device 400 can determine whether the tray 610 is placed at the third stop position Po23 substantially parallel to the side wall and the tray conveying mechanism 80. The state in which the tray 610 is placed substantially parallel to the side wall and the tray conveying mechanism 80 is a state in which the tray 610 is properly placed.
为了执行该判断处理，如图27中的27002所示，在上述侧壁的第三停止位置Po23的位置上设置有第二托盘检测部56。第二托盘检测部56设置在：在第三停止位置Po23处能够检测托盘610，但在使托盘610移动了规定距离的状态下无法检测托盘610的位置。In order to perform this determination process, as shown in 27002 in Fig. 27, a second pallet detection unit 56 is provided at the third stop position Po23 of the side wall. The second pallet detection unit 56 is provided so as to be able to detect the pallet 610 at the third stop position Po23, but not to be able to detect the position of the pallet 610 when the pallet 610 is moved a predetermined distance.
在托盘610被恰当地载置的情况下，当托盘输送机构80使被载置于第三停止位置Po23处的托盘610移动了规定距离时，托盘610沿着上述侧壁移动。该情况下，第二托盘检测部56变得无法检测托盘610。因此，当第二托盘检测部56变为无法检测托盘610时，控制装置400可判断为托盘610被恰当地载置。When the tray 610 is properly placed, when the tray conveying mechanism 80 moves the tray 610 placed at the third stop position Po23 by a predetermined distance, the tray 610 moves along the side wall. In this case, the second tray detection unit 56 cannot detect the tray 610. Therefore, when the second tray detection unit 56 cannot detect the tray 610, the control device 400 can determine that the tray 610 is properly placed.
另一方面，当托盘610未被恰当载置时，即使托盘输送机构80使被载置于第三停止位置Po23处的托盘610移动规定距离，托盘610也以托盘610的一部分被上述侧壁卡住并呈倾斜地状态停止。该情况下，第二托盘检测部56将继续检测托盘610。因此，当移动了上述规定距离后第二托盘检测部56继续检测托盘610时，控制装置400可判断为托盘610未被恰当载置。On the other hand, when the tray 610 is not properly loaded, even if the tray conveying mechanism 80 moves the tray 610 loaded at the third stop position Po23 by a predetermined distance, the tray 610 stops in a state where a part of the tray 610 is caught by the side wall and tilted. In this case, the second tray detection unit 56 continues to detect the tray 610. Therefore, when the second tray detection unit 56 continues to detect the tray 610 after moving the predetermined distance, the control device 400 can determine that the tray 610 is not properly loaded.
另外，在卡片信息变更单元100(例如：卡片装卸装置150的顶面)上设有发光装置(未图示)。当发生了错误时，控制装置400停止卡片信息变更单元100的驱动并且使发光装置亮灯。由此，用户能够识别到即使触摸了卡片信息变更单元100也为安全的状态。In addition, a light emitting device (not shown) is provided on the card information changing unit 100 (for example, the top surface of the card loading and unloading device 150). When an error occurs, the control device 400 stops driving the card information changing unit 100 and turns on the light emitting device. Thus, the user can recognize that the card information changing unit 100 is in a safe state even if it is touched.
进而，在插入口53的上部设置有物体检测部57。在托盘保管架60A被插入插入口53的状态下，物体检测部57检测从托盘保管架60A的开口部61A中跳出的托盘610。由此，能够降低处于向托盘保管架60A输送中的托盘610与从开口部61A跳出的托盘610碰撞的可能性。Furthermore, an object detector 57 is provided above the insertion port 53. The object detector 57 detects the pallet 610 jumping out of the opening 61A of the pallet storage rack 60A when the pallet storage rack 60A is inserted into the insertion port 53. This can reduce the possibility of the pallet 610 being transported to the pallet storage rack 60A colliding with the pallet 610 jumping out of the opening 61A.
当发生了错误时，物体检测部57作为对物体从插入口53向托盘发出装置50A内部的进入进行检测的传感器发挥作用。当发生了错误时，托盘发出装置50A所具备的各部均停止，因此，即使用户进入托盘发出装置50A的内部，也能够确保用户的安全性。但是，当错误被解除时，托盘发出装置50A所具备的各部开始驱动。此时，当在用户进入了托盘发出装置50A的内部的状态下直接开始该驱动时，用户将被置于危险之中。When an error occurs, the object detection unit 57 functions as a sensor that detects the entry of an object from the insertion port 53 into the tray dispensing device 50A. When an error occurs, each unit of the tray dispensing device 50A stops, so even if the user enters the tray dispensing device 50A, the user's safety can be ensured. However, when the error is resolved, each unit of the tray dispensing device 50A starts to drive. At this time, if the drive is started directly when the user enters the tray dispensing device 50A, the user will be put in danger.
因此，在本实施方式中，在错误发生期间当物体检测部57检测到上述物体的进入时，控制装置400不使托盘发出装置50A所具备的各部驱动。因此，能够确保用户的安全性。Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the object detector 57 detects the entry of the object during the error occurrence period, the control device 400 does not drive the various components included in the tray discharging device 50A. Therefore, the safety of the user can be ensured.
另外，也可以在托盘发出装置50A中设置声音输出装置，并且，控制装置400在发生错误时以及错误解除时，使声音输出装置输出声音。Alternatively, a sound output device may be provided in the tray output device 50A, and the control device 400 may cause the sound output device to output a sound when an error occurs and when the error is resolved.
[保管架更换通知控制][Storage rack replacement notification control]
作为控制装置400显示保管架更换消息的时间，可举出例如以下时间。保管架更换消息是指：用于提醒用户更换要插入到插入口53中的托盘保管架60A的消息。The control device 400 displays the storage rack replacement message at, for example, the following times: The storage rack replacement message is a message for prompting the user to replace the tray storage rack 60A to be inserted into the insertion port 53 .
(1)下一个发出的托盘610要被搬运的病房不同于在此之前发出的托盘610被搬运的病房时。但是，在基于处方数据的托盘610的发出中，加塞插进而发出临时的托盘610时，不显示保管架更换消息。(1) When the ward to which the next tray 610 to be issued is transported is different from the ward to which the previously issued tray 610 was transported. However, when a temporary tray 610 is issued by plugging in during the issuance of the tray 610 based on the prescription data, the storage rack replacement message is not displayed.
(2)托盘保管架60A已装满时。(2) When the tray storage rack 60A is full.
在本实施方式中，当升降装置300将要被搬运到多个病房的所有托盘610都保管于一个托盘保管架60A中时，触摸面板控制部470也可以不在触摸面板70上显示保管架更换消息。In the present embodiment, when the lifting device 300 stores all the trays 610 to be transported to a plurality of wards in one tray storage rack 60A, the touch panel control unit 470 may not display the storage rack replacement message on the touch panel 70 .
在显示了保管架更换消息时，升降装置300将托盘610朝向托盘保管架60A的输送停止。只要用户未在触摸面板70上进行用于执行托盘610向托盘保管架60A的发出的用户输入，升降装置300便不执行托盘610的再次发出动作。即使在托盘610被搬运的病房不同的情况下，当该托盘610被保管于一个托盘保管架60A时，也不需要更换托盘保管架60A。因此，如上所述，通过在该情况下不显示保管架更换消息，从而升降装置300能够在不停止托盘610的输送的情况下继续进行该输送。因此，能够缩短该输送所涉及的处理时间。When the storage rack replacement message is displayed, the lifting device 300 stops the conveyance of the tray 610 to the tray storage rack 60A. Unless the user performs a user input on the touch panel 70 to execute the sending of the tray 610 to the tray storage rack 60A, the lifting device 300 does not execute the re-sending operation of the tray 610. Even if the wards to which the tray 610 is transported are different, when the tray 610 is stored in one tray storage rack 60A, it is not necessary to replace the tray storage rack 60A. Therefore, as described above, by not displaying the storage rack replacement message in this case, the lifting device 300 can continue the conveyance of the tray 610 without stopping the conveyance. Therefore, the processing time involved in the conveyance can be shortened.
另一方面，考虑下述情况：即，判断为升降装置300无法将要被搬运至B病房的所有托盘610全部保管于以例如要被搬运至A病房的托盘610作为保管对象的托盘保管架60A中这一情况。该情况下，在要被搬运至A病房的托盘610全部被保管于该托盘保管架60A中时，控制装置400在触摸面板70上显示保管架更换消息。由此，用户能够将用于保管要被搬运到B病房的托盘610的其他托盘保管架60A插入到插入口53中。另外，能够降低要被搬运到B病房的托盘610被保管于不同托盘保管架60A中的可能性。On the other hand, consider the following case: that is, the lifting device 300 determines that it is impossible to store all the pallets 610 to be transported to the B ward in the pallet storage rack 60A that stores the pallets 610 to be transported to the A ward, for example. In this case, when all the pallets 610 to be transported to the A ward are stored in the pallet storage rack 60A, the control device 400 displays a storage rack replacement message on the touch panel 70. As a result, the user can insert another pallet storage rack 60A for storing the pallets 610 to be transported to the B ward into the insertion port 53. In addition, the possibility that the pallet 610 to be transported to the B ward is stored in a different pallet storage rack 60A can be reduced.
另外，要被搬运到各病房的托盘610的数量是根据处方数据而计算。因此，升降装置300能够判断要被搬运到多个病房的托盘610是否能够保管于一个托盘保管架60A中。托盘610的数量例如可以由控制装置400或控制装置400的上一级系统计算。In addition, the number of trays 610 to be transported to each ward is calculated based on the prescription data. Therefore, the lifting device 300 can determine whether the trays 610 to be transported to multiple wards can be stored in one tray storage rack 60A. The number of trays 610 can be calculated by, for example, the control device 400 or a higher-level system of the control device 400.
[托盘供给装置][Tray supply device]
如图1所示，托盘供给装置10将托盘610(图1中为托盘600)以堆叠的状态加以保持。托盘供给装置10仅将最下层的托盘610载置在向各装置输送托盘610的托盘输送机构80(参照图27)上。当托盘输送机构80向标签打印装置20输送托盘610时，托盘供给装置10将堆叠保持的托盘610之中最下层的托盘610载置于托盘输送机构80。As shown in FIG. 1 , the tray supply device 10 holds the trays 610 (trays 600 in FIG. 1 ) in a stacked state. The tray supply device 10 places only the tray 610 at the bottom on the tray conveying mechanism 80 (see FIG. 27 ) that conveys the trays 610 to each device. When the tray conveying mechanism 80 conveys the tray 610 to the label printing device 20, the tray supply device 10 places the tray 610 at the bottom of the stacked trays 610 on the tray conveying mechanism 80.
在使用实施方式一的托盘600时，要求以托盘600的设置有卡片支架500的面朝向同一方向的方式堆叠所有的托盘600。在以上述面朝向同一方向的方式堆叠了托盘600时，如图1所示，能够以托盘600的开口面(收纳或取出药剂的顶面)大致平行的方式稳定地堆叠托盘600。换言之，若不以上述面朝向同一方向的方式堆叠的话，便不能稳定地堆叠托盘600。When using the tray 600 of the first embodiment, it is required to stack all the trays 600 in such a manner that the surfaces of the trays 600 provided with the card holders 500 face the same direction. When the trays 600 are stacked in such a manner that the surfaces face the same direction, as shown in FIG. 1 , the trays 600 can be stably stacked in such a manner that the opening surfaces (top surfaces for storing or taking out medicines) of the trays 600 are substantially parallel. In other words, if the trays 600 are not stacked in such a manner that the surfaces face the same direction, the trays 600 cannot be stably stacked.
所有托盘600在以上述面朝向标签打印装置20侧方向的方式被堆叠的状态下，被配置在托盘供给装置10上。但是，为了使控制装置400判断托盘600是否以该状态被配置，在托盘供给装置10上，与被载置于托盘输送机构80的托盘600的卡片支架500相对的位置处，设置有支架检测部(未图示)。All the trays 600 are arranged on the tray supply device 10 in a state where they are stacked with their surfaces facing the label printing device 20. However, in order for the control device 400 to determine whether the trays 600 are arranged in this state, a holder detection unit (not shown) is provided on the tray supply device 10 at a position opposite to the card holder 500 of the tray 600 placed on the tray conveying mechanism 80.
支架检测部是检测被载置于托盘输送机构80上的托盘600的卡片支架500的传感器。仅在被载置于托盘输送机构80上的托盘600的卡片支架500朝向标签打印装置20侧方向时，支架检测部能够检测卡片支架500。因此，当托盘600以卡片支架500朝向与标签打印装置20相反一侧的方式被载置于托盘输送机构80时，控制装置400可通知用户移除该托盘600。The holder detection unit is a sensor that detects the card holder 500 of the tray 600 placed on the tray conveying mechanism 80. The holder detection unit can detect the card holder 500 only when the card holder 500 of the tray 600 placed on the tray conveying mechanism 80 faces the label printing device 20 side. Therefore, when the tray 600 is placed on the tray conveying mechanism 80 with the card holder 500 facing the side opposite to the label printing device 20, the control device 400 can notify the user to remove the tray 600.
如上所述，当使用托盘600时，所有托盘600均在以设置有卡片支架500的面朝向标签打印装置20侧方向的方式被堆叠的状态下，被配置在托盘供给装置10上。因此，支架检测部只要仅在托盘供给装置10最初将托盘600载置于托盘输送机构80时(载置了最下层的托盘600时)，执行该托盘600的卡片支架500的检测动作即可。As described above, when the trays 600 are used, all the trays 600 are arranged on the tray supply device 10 in a state where they are stacked with the surface provided with the card holder 500 facing the label printing device 20. Therefore, the holder detection unit only needs to perform the detection operation of the card holder 500 of the tray 600 when the tray supply device 10 initially places the tray 600 on the tray conveying mechanism 80 (when the lowermost tray 600 is placed).
另一方面，当使用了本实施方式的托盘610时，即使不以设置有卡片支架510A的面朝向同一方向的方式堆叠托盘610，也能够稳定地堆叠托盘610。因此，在托盘供给装置10中堆叠的托盘610的卡片支架510A不限于全部朝向标签打印装置20侧。例如，即使最下层的托盘610朝向标签打印装置20侧，在更上层的托盘610中卡片支架510A也有可能朝向与标签打印装置20相反的一侧。因此，在仅对最下层的托盘610执行了上述检测动作时，即使存在卡片支架510A朝向与标签打印装置20相反一侧的托盘610，也无法对该托盘610进行检测。该情况下，在卡片信息变更单元100的卡片装卸装置150无法拔出重写卡RC这一错误发生之前，无法通知用户卡片支架510A朝向与标签打印装置20相反一侧这一情况。由于为将药剂收纳于托盘610之后的错误通知，因此至发药系统1A的动作恢复为止需要时间。On the other hand, when the tray 610 of the present embodiment is used, the tray 610 can be stably stacked even if the trays 610 are not stacked in such a manner that the surfaces provided with the card holders 510A face the same direction. Therefore, the card holders 510A of the trays 610 stacked in the tray supply device 10 are not limited to all facing the label printing device 20 side. For example, even if the tray 610 in the lowest layer faces the label printing device 20 side, the card holders 510A in the trays 610 in the upper layer may face the side opposite to the label printing device 20. Therefore, when the above-mentioned detection operation is performed only on the tray 610 in the lowest layer, even if there is a tray 610 with the card holder 510A facing the side opposite to the label printing device 20, the tray 610 cannot be detected. In this case, before the error occurs that the card loading and unloading device 150 of the card information changing unit 100 cannot remove the rewrite card RC, the user cannot be notified that the card holder 510A faces the side opposite to the label printing device 20. Since this is an error notification after the medicines are stored in the tray 610, it takes time to restore the operation of the medicine dispensing system 1A.
在本实施方式中，在使用托盘610的情况下，每次托盘供给装置10将托盘610载置于托盘输送机构80(即，每一托盘)时，支架检测部便执行卡片支架510A的检测动作。当支架检测部无法检测卡片支架510A时，控制装置400通知用户移除该托盘610。因此，在托盘610通过托盘输送机构80被输送之前，能够通知用户卡片支架510A朝向与标签打印装置20相反一侧这一情况。因此，由于在将药剂收纳于托盘610之后无需进行错误通知，因此能够在短时间内恢复发药系统1A的动作。In the present embodiment, when the tray 610 is used, each time the tray supply device 10 places the tray 610 on the tray conveying mechanism 80 (i.e., each tray), the holder detection unit performs a detection operation of the card holder 510A. When the holder detection unit cannot detect the card holder 510A, the control device 400 notifies the user to remove the tray 610. Therefore, before the tray 610 is conveyed by the tray conveying mechanism 80, the user can be notified that the card holder 510A is facing the side opposite to the label printing device 20. Therefore, since there is no need to perform an error notification after the medicine is stored in the tray 610, the operation of the medicine dispensing system 1A can be restored in a short time.
另外，在使用托盘600的情况下，支架检测部也可以对每一托盘执行检测动作。当卡片支架500未朝向标签打印装置20侧的托盘600被配置于托盘供给装置10时，托盘检测部能够检测该托盘600。In addition, when using the tray 600 , the tray detection unit may perform detection for each tray. When a tray 600 with the card holder 500 not facing the label printing device 20 is arranged in the tray supply device 10 , the tray detection unit can detect the tray 600 .
[通过软件实现的例子][Example of implementation by software]
控制装置400的控制块(尤其是升降控制部410、移动控制部420、电磁阀控制部430、卡片有无判断部440、卡片输送控制部450、显示变更控制部460以及触摸面板控制部470)，可以通过形成于集成电路(IC芯片)等的逻辑电路(硬件)实现，也可以通过软件实现。The control blocks of the control device 400 (especially the lifting control unit 410, the movement control unit 420, the solenoid valve control unit 430, the card presence judgment unit 440, the card conveying control unit 450, the display change control unit 460 and the touch panel control unit 470) can be implemented by a logic circuit (hardware) formed in an integrated circuit (IC chip), etc., or by software.
在后者的情况下，控制装置400具备计算机，该计算机执行作为实现各功能的软件的程序的指令。该计算机具备例如一个以上的处理器，并且具备存储有上述程序的计算机可读记录介质。而且，在上述计算机中，通过由上述处理器从上述记录介质中读取上述程序并执行该程序，从而实现本发明的目的。作为上述处理器，例如可使用CPU(中央处理单元)。作为上述记录介质，可使用例如ROM(只读存储器)等以及磁带、磁盘、卡、半导体存储器、可编程逻辑电路等的“非临时有形介质”。另外，也可以进一步具备用于扩展上述程序的RAM(随机存取存储器)等。另外，上述程序也可以经由能够传送该程序的任意传送介质(通信网络或广播波等)而被提供给上述计算机。另外，本发明的一实施方式还能够以上述程序通过电子传输被实现的、嵌入在载波中的数据信号的形态而实现。In the latter case, the control device 400 has a computer that executes instructions of a program as software that realizes each function. The computer has, for example, one or more processors and a computer-readable recording medium storing the above-mentioned program. Moreover, in the above-mentioned computer, the purpose of the present invention is achieved by reading the above-mentioned program from the above-mentioned recording medium by the above-mentioned processor and executing the program. As the above-mentioned processor, for example, a CPU (central processing unit) can be used. As the above-mentioned recording medium, "non-temporary tangible media" such as ROM (read-only memory) and magnetic tapes, disks, cards, semiconductor memories, programmable logic circuits, etc. can be used. In addition, it is also possible to further have a RAM (random access memory) for expanding the above-mentioned program. In addition, the above-mentioned program can also be provided to the above-mentioned computer via any transmission medium (communication network or broadcast wave, etc.) that can transmit the program. In addition, one embodiment of the present invention can also be implemented in the form of a data signal embedded in a carrier wave in which the above-mentioned program is implemented by electronic transmission.
(附记事项)(Additional Notes)
本发明不限于上述各实施方式，在权利要求所示的范围内可以进行各种变更，并且，通过适当地组合不同实施方式中分别公开的技术方案而获得的实施方式，也应包括在本发明的技术范围内。The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the claims. In addition, embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical solutions respectively disclosed in different embodiments should also be included in the technical scope of the present invention.
(符号说明)(Explanation of symbols)
60、60A…托盘保管架60, 60A…Pallet storage rack
150…卡片装卸装置(卡片安装装置)150…Card loading and unloading device (card installation device)
151…卡片吸附部151…Card adsorption unit
152、153…引导部(弯曲机构)152, 153 ...Guide (bending mechanism)
154、155…辊154, 155…Roller
156、157…O形圈(缓冲部件)156, 157…O-ring (buffer component)
161…支撑部(弯曲机构)161…Supporting part (bending mechanism)
162、163…支撑轴(弯曲机构)162, 163…Support shaft (bending mechanism)
164、165…弹簧(伸缩部件)164, 165…Spring (telescopic component)
173…Z轴电动机(插入动作部)173…Z-axis motor (insertion motion part)
174…θ轴电动机(旋转部、卡片移动部)174…θ-axis motor (rotating part, card moving part)
200…卡片输送装置200…Card conveyor
210…卡片载置部(卡片保持部、第二卡片保持部)210 ...Card loading section (card holding section, second card holding section)
211…开口部(区域)211…Opening (area)
212…底部212…Bottom
213、214…侧壁213, 214…side wall
250…显示变更装置250…Display change device
300…升降装置(托盘输送装置)300...Lifting device (pallet conveyor)
301…托盘输送部301…Pallet conveyor
500～504、510、510A…卡片支架(卡片保持部、第一卡片保持部)500 to 504, 510, 510A ... card holder (card holding portion, first card holding portion)
511、561…外缘部511, 561…outer edge
512、521、531、562…底部512, 521, 531, 562… bottom
514、533、564…爪部514, 533, 564…claws
516…通气孔516…Vent
515、523、551…卡片引导部515, 523, 551…Card guide
517…开口部517…Opening
561t…上部壁(侧壁)561t…Upper wall (side wall)
563…卡片安装部(区域)563…Card installation area
565…卡片支撑部565…Card support
566…切口部566…Incision
600、610、620…托盘600, 610, 620…Pallets
RC…重写卡(卡片)RC…Rewrite Card
RCc…角部RCc…corner
Po11…第一位置Po11…1st position
Po12…第二位置Po12…2nd place
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2019135602 | 2019-07-23 | ||
| JP2019-135602 | 2019-07-23 | ||
| JP2020-030857 | 2020-02-26 | ||
| JP2020030857 | 2020-02-26 | ||
| PCT/JP2020/028260WO2021015197A1 (en) | 2019-07-23 | 2020-07-21 | Card mounting device, card dismounting device, card holder, and tray conveyance device |
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN113994342A CN113994342A (en) | 2022-01-28 |
| CN113994342Btrue CN113994342B (en) | 2024-08-27 |
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202080041542.7AActiveCN113994342B (en) | 2019-07-23 | 2020-07-21 | Card mounting device, card loading/unloading device, card holder, and tray conveying device |
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| JP (1) | JP7376811B2 (en) |
| KR (1) | KR20220038340A (en) |
| CN (1) | CN113994342B (en) |
| TW (1) | TWI856138B (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2021015197A1 (en) |
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| TWI814375B (en)* | 2022-05-10 | 2023-09-01 | 鴻勁精密股份有限公司 | Supporting tray apparatus, tray-taking method, tray-feeding method and handler |
| CN115108227B (en)* | 2022-08-08 | 2023-08-29 | 青岛盈智科技有限公司 | Method and system for warehousing goods in vertical warehouse of stacker for cold chain warehousing |
| NO347965B1 (en)* | 2022-10-28 | 2024-06-03 | Autostore Tech As | A device and method for inserting storage containers into an automated storage and retrieval system |
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS61190429A (en)* | 1985-02-13 | 1986-08-25 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Method of displaying content of material to be carried |
| JP2000014301A (en)* | 1998-07-03 | 2000-01-18 | Shimano Inc | Belt mounting structure and fishing rod case |
| JP4679168B2 (en)* | 2004-11-08 | 2011-04-27 | 株式会社湯山製作所 | Desorption device, display change device, and medication system |
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPH0891382A (en)* | 1994-09-26 | 1996-04-09 | Nippon Paper Ind Co Ltd | Container and method for taking out card attached to container |
| JP3805542B2 (en) | 1998-11-11 | 2006-08-02 | 株式会社東京自働機械製作所 | Card feeding device and feeding method |
| JP3737697B2 (en)* | 2000-11-30 | 2006-01-18 | 株式会社湯山製作所 | Carryer display member writing device |
| WO2005105619A1 (en)* | 2004-04-30 | 2005-11-10 | Yuyama Mfg. Co., Ltd. | Medicine supply system |
| JP5350724B2 (en)* | 2008-09-19 | 2013-11-27 | パナソニック株式会社 | Drug dispensing apparatus and drug dispensing method |
| CN103990201B (en)* | 2009-07-01 | 2017-06-06 | 弗雷塞尼斯医疗保健控股公司 | Delivery device and related system and method |
| US20140155827A1 (en)* | 2012-12-03 | 2014-06-05 | Mylan, Inc. | Medicament information system and method |
| US10380326B2 (en)* | 2013-05-22 | 2019-08-13 | Carefusion 303, Inc. | Medication delivery management |
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS61190429A (en)* | 1985-02-13 | 1986-08-25 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Method of displaying content of material to be carried |
| JP2000014301A (en)* | 1998-07-03 | 2000-01-18 | Shimano Inc | Belt mounting structure and fishing rod case |
| JP4679168B2 (en)* | 2004-11-08 | 2011-04-27 | 株式会社湯山製作所 | Desorption device, display change device, and medication system |
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN113994342A (en) | 2022-01-28 |
| TWI856138B (en) | 2024-09-21 |
| JP7376811B2 (en) | 2023-11-09 |
| WO2021015197A1 (en) | 2021-01-28 |
| KR20220038340A (en) | 2022-03-28 |
| JPWO2021015197A1 (en) | 2021-01-28 |
| TW202120058A (en) | 2021-06-01 |
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN113994342B (en) | Card mounting device, card loading/unloading device, card holder, and tray conveying device | |
| CN102431808B (en) | Drug tray supply device | |
| JP7541267B2 (en) | Drug delivery mechanism and drug removal method | |
| US11897647B2 (en) | Individual packaging device for tablets | |
| KR101192480B1 (en) | Tray discharge device | |
| KR101167332B1 (en) | Medicine supply system | |
| CN110662522B (en) | Medicament cartridge operating device and medicament dispensing device | |
| JP2006109859A (en) | Dispensing medicament put-out device | |
| JP2024056147A (en) | Drug dispensing device, information processing device, and drug handling device | |
| JPWO2014175060A1 (en) | Drug dispensing device, drug dispensing method, and drug storage cassette | |
| JP2008037510A (en) | Drug picking system | |
| JP7531739B2 (en) | Medicine sorting device | |
| JP7620207B2 (en) | Drug handling equipment | |
| JP2024173612A (en) | Storage device | |
| JP2006109858A (en) | Dispensing medicament put-out device | |
| JP2019076573A (en) | Medicament delivery device, and medicament sorting apparatus and medicament dispenser including the same |
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| GR01 | Patent grant | ||
| GR01 | Patent grant |